1\input texinfo @c                               -*-Texinfo-*-
2@c  Copyright (C) 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3@c UPDATE!!  On future updates--
4@c   (1)   check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
5@c         md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
6@c   (2)   for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
7@c         in config/tc-*.c
8@c   (3)   for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
9@c         in config/obj-*.c
10@c   (4)   portable directives in potable[] in read.c
11@c %**start of header
12@setfilename as.info
13@c ---config---
14@macro gcctabopt{body}
15@code{\body\}
16@end macro
17@c defaults, config file may override:
18@set have-stabs
19@c ---
20@c man begin NAME
21@c ---
22@include asconfig.texi
23@include bfdver.texi
24@c ---
25@c man end
26@c ---
27@c common OR combinations of conditions
28@ifset COFF
29@set COFF-ELF
30@end ifset
31@ifset ELF
32@set COFF-ELF
33@end ifset
34@ifset AOUT
35@set aout-bout
36@end ifset
37@ifset ARM/Thumb
38@set ARM
39@end ifset
40@ifset Blackfin
41@set Blackfin
42@end ifset
43@ifset BOUT
44@set aout-bout
45@end ifset
46@ifset H8/300
47@set H8
48@end ifset
49@ifset SH
50@set H8
51@end ifset
52@ifset HPPA
53@set abnormal-separator
54@end ifset
55@c ------------
56@ifset GENERIC
57@settitle Using @value{AS}
58@end ifset
59@ifclear GENERIC
60@settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
61@end ifclear
62@setchapternewpage odd
63@c %**end of header
64
65@c @smallbook
66@c @set SMALL
67@c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
68@c instructions.  Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
69@c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
70@c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
71@c
72@c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
73@c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
74@c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
75@c break.
76@c
77@c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
78@c not well for the default large-page format.  This manual expects that if you
79@c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
80@c tables in question.  You can turn on one without the other at your
81@c discretion, of course.
82@ifinfo
83@set SMALL
84@c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
85@c might as well show 'em anyways.
86@end ifinfo
87
88@ifnottex
89@dircategory Software development
90@direntry
91* As: (as).                     The GNU assembler.
92* Gas: (as).                    The GNU assembler.
93@end direntry
94@end ifnottex
95
96@finalout
97@syncodeindex ky cp
98
99@copying
100This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
101
102@c man begin COPYRIGHT
103Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
104
105Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
106under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
107or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
108with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
109Back-Cover Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the
110section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
111
112@c man end
113@end copying
114
115@titlepage
116@title Using @value{AS}
117@subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
118@ifclear GENERIC
119@subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
120@end ifclear
121@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
122@sp 1
123@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
124@end ifset
125@sp 1
126@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
127@sp 1
128@sp 13
129The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
130Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
131first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
132The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
133distracting the boss while they got some work
134done.
135@sp 3
136@author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
137@page
138@tex
139{\parskip=0pt
140\hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
141\hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
142}
143%"boxit" macro for figures:
144%Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
145\gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
146     \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
147#2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
148\gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
149@end tex
150
151@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
152Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
153
154      Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
155      under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
156      or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
157      with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
158      Back-Cover Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the
159      section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
160
161@end titlepage
162@contents
163
164@ifnottex
165@node Top
166@top Using @value{AS}
167
168This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
169@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
170@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
171@end ifset
172version @value{VERSION}.
173@ifclear GENERIC
174This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
175code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
176@end ifclear
177
178This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
179Documentation License.  A copy of the license is included in the
180section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
181
182@menu
183* Overview::                    Overview
184* Invoking::                    Command-Line Options
185* Syntax::                      Syntax
186* Sections::                    Sections and Relocation
187* Symbols::                     Symbols
188* Expressions::                 Expressions
189* Pseudo Ops::                  Assembler Directives
190@ifset ELF
191* Object Attributes::           Object Attributes
192@end ifset
193* Machine Dependencies::        Machine Dependent Features
194* Reporting Bugs::              Reporting Bugs
195* Acknowledgements::            Who Did What
196* GNU Free Documentation License::  GNU Free Documentation License
197* AS Index::                    AS Index
198@end menu
199@end ifnottex
200
201@node Overview
202@chapter Overview
203@iftex
204This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
205@ifclear GENERIC
206This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
207code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
208@end ifclear
209@end iftex
210
211@cindex invocation summary
212@cindex option summary
213@cindex summary of options
214Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.  For details,
215see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
216
217@c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
218
219@ignore
220@c man begin SEEALSO
221gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
222@c man end
223@end ignore
224
225@c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
226@c to be limited to one line for the header.
227@smallexample
228@c man begin SYNOPSIS
229@value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
230 [@b{--compress-debug-sections}]  [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}]
231 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
232 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
233 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-2}] [@b{--gdwarf-sections}]
234 [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
235 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
236 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
237 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}]
238 [@b{--no-pad-sections}]
239 [@b{-o} @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}]
240 [@b{--hash-size}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--reduce-memory-overheads}]
241 [@b{--statistics}]
242 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}]
243 [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}] [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}]
244 [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
245 [@b{--sectname-subst}] [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}]
246 [@b{--elf-stt-common=[no|yes]}]
247 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
248 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
249@c
250@c man end
251@c Target dependent options are listed below.  Keep the list sorted.
252@c Add an empty line for separation.
253@c man begin TARGET
254@ifset AARCH64
255
256@emph{Target AArch64 options:}
257   [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
258   [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
259@end ifset
260@ifset ALPHA
261
262@emph{Target Alpha options:}
263   [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
264   [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
265   [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
266   [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
267   [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
268@end ifset
269@ifset ARC
270
271@emph{Target ARC options:}
272   [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
273   [@b{-mA6}|@b{-mARC600}|@b{-mARC601}|@b{-mA7}|@b{-mARC700}|@b{-mEM}|@b{-mHS}]
274   [@b{-mcode-density}]
275   [@b{-mrelax}]
276   [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
277@end ifset
278@ifset ARM
279
280@emph{Target ARM options:}
281@c Don't document the deprecated options
282   [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
283   [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
284   [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
285   [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
286   [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
287   [@b{-mthumb}]
288   [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
289   [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
290    @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
291   [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
292@end ifset
293@ifset Blackfin
294
295@emph{Target Blackfin options:}
296   [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]]
297   [@b{-mfdpic}]
298   [@b{-mno-fdpic}]
299   [@b{-mnopic}]
300@end ifset
301@ifset CRIS
302
303@emph{Target CRIS options:}
304   [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
305   [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
306   [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
307   [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
308@c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
309@c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
310@end ifset
311@ifset D10V
312
313@emph{Target D10V options:}
314   [@b{-O}]
315@end ifset
316@ifset D30V
317
318@emph{Target D30V options:}
319   [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
320@end ifset
321@ifset EPIPHANY
322
323@emph{Target EPIPHANY options:}
324   [@b{-mepiphany}|@b{-mepiphany16}]
325@end ifset
326@ifset H8
327
328@emph{Target H8/300 options:}
329   [-h-tick-hex]
330@end ifset
331@ifset HPPA
332@c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
333@end ifset
334@ifset I80386
335
336@emph{Target i386 options:}
337   [@b{--32}|@b{--x32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
338   [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
339@end ifset
340@ifset I960
341
342@emph{Target i960 options:}
343@c see md_parse_option in tc-i960.c
344   [@b{-ACA}|@b{-ACA_A}|@b{-ACB}|@b{-ACC}|@b{-AKA}|@b{-AKB}|
345    @b{-AKC}|@b{-AMC}]
346   [@b{-b}] [@b{-no-relax}]
347@end ifset
348@ifset IA64
349
350@emph{Target IA-64 options:}
351   [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
352   [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
353   [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
354   [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
355   [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
356   [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
357   [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
358@end ifset
359@ifset IP2K
360
361@emph{Target IP2K options:}
362   [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
363@end ifset
364@ifset M32C
365
366@emph{Target M32C options:}
367   [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
368@end ifset
369@ifset M32R
370
371@emph{Target M32R options:}
372   [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
373   @b{--W[n]p}]
374@end ifset
375@ifset M680X0
376
377@emph{Target M680X0 options:}
378   [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
379@end ifset
380@ifset M68HC11
381
382@emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
383   [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}|@b{-mm9s12x}|@b{-mm9s12xg}]
384   [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
385   [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
386   [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
387   [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
388   [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
389@end ifset
390@ifset MCORE
391
392@emph{Target MCORE options:}
393   [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
394   [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
395@end ifset
396@ifset METAG
397
398@emph{Target Meta options:}
399   [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mfpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mdsp=@var{cpu}}]
400@end ifset
401@ifset MICROBLAZE
402@emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
403@c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
404@end ifset
405@ifset MIPS
406
407@emph{Target MIPS options:}
408   [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
409   [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
410   [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
411   [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
412   [@b{-mfp64}] [@b{-mgp64}] [@b{-mfpxx}]
413   [@b{-modd-spreg}] [@b{-mno-odd-spreg}]
414   [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
415   [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
416   [@b{-mips32r3}] [@b{-mips32r5}] [@b{-mips32r6}] [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
417   [@b{-mips64r3}] [@b{-mips64r5}] [@b{-mips64r6}]
418   [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
419   [@b{-mnan=@var{encoding}}]
420   [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
421   [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
422   [@b{-mmicromips}] [@b{-mno-micromips}]
423   [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
424   [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
425   [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
426   [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
427   [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
428   [@b{-mdspr3}] [@b{-mno-dspr3}]
429   [@b{-mmsa}] [@b{-mno-msa}]
430   [@b{-mxpa}] [@b{-mno-xpa}]
431   [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
432   [@b{-mmcu}] [@b{-mno-mcu}]
433   [@b{-minsn32}] [@b{-mno-insn32}]
434   [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
435   [@b{-mfix-rm7000}] [@b{-mno-fix-rm7000}]
436   [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}]
437   [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}]
438   [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
439   [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
440@end ifset
441@ifset MMIX
442
443@emph{Target MMIX options:}
444   [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
445   [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
446   [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
447   [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
448@end ifset
449@ifset NIOSII
450
451@emph{Target Nios II options:}
452   [@b{-relax-all}] [@b{-relax-section}] [@b{-no-relax}]
453   [@b{-EB}] [@b{-EL}]
454@end ifset
455@ifset NDS32
456
457@emph{Target NDS32 options:}
458    [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}] [@b{-Os}] [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
459    [@b{-misa=@var{isa}}] [@b{-mabi=@var{abi}}] [@b{-mall-ext}]
460    [@b{-m[no-]16-bit}]  [@b{-m[no-]perf-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]perf2-ext}]
461    [@b{-m[no-]string-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]dsp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]mac}] [@b{-m[no-]div}]
462    [@b{-m[no-]audio-isa-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-sp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-dp-ext}]
463    [@b{-m[no-]fpu-fma}] [@b{-mfpu-freg=@var{FREG}}] [@b{-mreduced-regs}]
464    [@b{-mfull-regs}] [@b{-m[no-]dx-regs}] [@b{-mpic}] [@b{-mno-relax}]
465    [@b{-mb2bb}]
466@end ifset
467@ifset PDP11
468
469@emph{Target PDP11 options:}
470   [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
471   [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
472   [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
473@end ifset
474@ifset PJ
475
476@emph{Target picoJava options:}
477   [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
478@end ifset
479@ifset PPC
480
481@emph{Target PowerPC options:}
482   [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}]
483   [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|
484    @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mppc64}|
485    @b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-me5500}|@b{-me6500}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|
486    @b{-mbooke}|@b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpwr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|@b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}|
487    @b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpwr7}|@b{-mpower8}|@b{-mpwr8}|@b{-mpower9}|@b{-mpwr9}@b{-ma2}|
488    @b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mcom}]
489   [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}|@b{-mhtm}|@b{-mvle}]
490   [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
491   [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}]
492   [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}]
493   [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
494   [@b{-nops=@var{count}}]
495@end ifset
496@ifset RL78
497
498@emph{Target RL78 options:}
499   [@b{-mg10}]
500   [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
501@end ifset
502@ifset RX
503
504@emph{Target RX options:}
505   [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
506   [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
507   [@b{-muse-conventional-section-names}]
508   [@b{-msmall-data-limit}]
509   [@b{-mpid}]
510   [@b{-mrelax}]
511   [@b{-mint-register=@var{number}}]
512   [@b{-mgcc-abi}|@b{-mrx-abi}]
513@end ifset
514@ifset S390
515
516@emph{Target s390 options:}
517   [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
518   [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
519   [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
520@end ifset
521@ifset SCORE
522
523@emph{Target SCORE options:}
524   [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
525   [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
526   [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
527   [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
528@end ifset
529@ifset SPARC
530
531@emph{Target SPARC options:}
532@c The order here is important.  See c-sparc.texi.
533   [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
534    @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}]
535   [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}] [@b{-bump}]
536   [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
537@end ifset
538@ifset TIC54X
539
540@emph{Target TIC54X options:}
541 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
542 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
543@end ifset
544@ifset TIC6X
545
546@emph{Target TIC6X options:}
547   [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}]
548   [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}]
549   [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}]
550@end ifset
551@ifset TILEGX
552
553@emph{Target TILE-Gx options:}
554   [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}][@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}]
555@end ifset
556@ifset TILEPRO
557@c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options
558@end ifset
559@ifset VISIUM
560
561@emph{Target Visium options:}
562   [@b{-mtune=@var{arch}}]
563@end ifset
564@ifset XTENSA
565
566@emph{Target Xtensa options:}
567 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]auto-litpools}]
568 [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
569 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
570 [@b{--[no-]transform}]
571 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
572 [@b{--[no-]trampolines}]
573@end ifset
574@ifset Z80
575
576@emph{Target Z80 options:}
577  [@b{-z80}] [@b{-r800}]
578  [@b{ -ignore-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wnud}]
579  [@b{ -ignore-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wnup}]
580  [@b{ -warn-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wud}]
581  [@b{ -warn-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wup}]
582  [@b{ -forbid-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Fud}]
583  [@b{ -forbid-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Fup}]
584@end ifset
585@ifset Z8000
586
587@c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
588@end ifset
589
590@c man end
591@end smallexample
592
593@c man begin OPTIONS
594
595@table @gcctabopt
596@include at-file.texi
597
598@item -a[cdghlmns]
599Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
600
601@table @gcctabopt
602@item -ac
603omit false conditionals
604
605@item -ad
606omit debugging directives
607
608@item -ag
609include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
610
611@item -ah
612include high-level source
613
614@item -al
615include assembly
616
617@item -am
618include macro expansions
619
620@item -an
621omit forms processing
622
623@item -as
624include symbols
625
626@item =file
627set the name of the listing file
628@end table
629
630You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
631listing without forms processing.  The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
632the last one.  By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
633
634@item --alternate
635Begin in alternate macro mode.
636@ifclear man
637@xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
638@end ifclear
639
640@item --compress-debug-sections
641Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib with SHF_COMPRESSED from the
642ELF ABI.  The resulting object file may not be compatible with older
643linkers and object file utilities.  Note if compression would make a
644given section @emph{larger} then it is not compressed.
645
646@ifset ELF
647@cindex @samp{--compress-debug-sections=} option
648@item --compress-debug-sections=none
649@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
650@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
651@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
652These options control how DWARF debug sections are compressed.
653@option{--compress-debug-sections=none} is equivalent to
654@option{--nocompress-debug-sections}.
655@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} and
656@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi} are equivalent to
657@option{--compress-debug-sections}.
658@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
659sections using zlib.  The debug sections are renamed to begin with
660@samp{.zdebug}.  Note if compression would make a given section
661@emph{larger} then it is not compressed nor renamed.
662
663@end ifset
664
665@item --nocompress-debug-sections
666Do not compress DWARF debug sections.  This is usually the default for all
667targets except the x86/x86_64, but a configure time option can be used to
668override this.
669
670@item -D
671Ignored.  This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
672other assemblers.
673
674@item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
675When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
676information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
677
678@item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
679Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
680@var{value} must be an integer constant.  As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
681indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
682value.  The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
683use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
684
685@item -f
686``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
687compiler output).
688
689@item -g
690@itemx --gen-debug
691Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
692debug format is preferred by the target.  This currently means either STABS,
693ECOFF or DWARF2.
694
695@item --gstabs
696Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line.  This
697may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
698
699@item --gstabs+
700Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
701extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
702debuggers crash or refuse to read your program.  This
703may help debugging assembler code.  Currently the only GNU extension is
704the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
705
706@item --gdwarf-2
707Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line.  This
708may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.  Note---this
709option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
710
711@item --gdwarf-sections
712Instead of creating a .debug_line section, create a series of
713.debug_line.@var{foo} sections where @var{foo} is the name of the
714corresponding code section.  For example a code section called @var{.text.func}
715will have its dwarf line number information placed into a section called
716@var{.debug_line.text.func}.  If the code section is just called @var{.text}
717then debug line section will still be called just @var{.debug_line} without any
718suffix.
719
720@ifset ELF
721@item --size-check=error
722@itemx --size-check=warning
723Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
724
725@item --elf-stt-common=no
726@itemx --elf-stt-common=yes
727These options control whether the ELF assembler should generate common
728symbols with the @code{STT_COMMON} type.  The default can be controlled
729by a configure option @option{--enable-elf-stt-common}.
730@end ifset
731
732@item --help
733Print a summary of the command line options and exit.
734
735@item --target-help
736Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
737
738@item -I @var{dir}
739Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
740
741@item -J
742Don't warn about signed overflow.
743
744@item -K
745@ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
746This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
747@end ifclear
748@ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
749Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
750@end ifset
751
752@item -L
753@itemx --keep-locals
754Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols.  These symbols start with
755system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
756or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
757@ifclear man
758@xref{Symbol Names}.
759@end ifclear
760
761@item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
762Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
763listing to @var{number}.
764
765@item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
766Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
767lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
768
769@item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
770Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
771@var{number} bytes.
772
773@item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
774Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
775to @var{number} + 1.
776
777@item --no-pad-sections
778Stop the assembler for padding the ends of output sections to the alignment
779of that section.  The default is to pad the sections, but this can waste space
780which might be needed on targets which have tight memory constraints.
781
782@item -o @var{objfile}
783Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
784
785@item -R
786Fold the data section into the text section.
787
788@item --hash-size=@var{number}
789Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close to
790@var{number}.  Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it takes the
791assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of increasing the assembler's
792memory requirements.  Similarly reducing this value can reduce the memory
793requirements at the expense of speed.
794
795@item --reduce-memory-overheads
796This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of making the
797assembly processes slower.  Currently this switch is a synonym for
798@samp{--hash-size=4051}, but in the future it may have other effects as well.
799
800@ifset ELF
801@item --sectname-subst
802Honor substitution sequences in section names.
803@ifclear man
804@xref{Section Name Substitutions,,@code{.section @var{name}}}.
805@end ifclear
806@end ifset
807
808@item --statistics
809Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
810assembly.
811
812@item --strip-local-absolute
813Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
814
815@item -v
816@itemx -version
817Print the @command{as} version.
818
819@item --version
820Print the @command{as} version and exit.
821
822@item -W
823@itemx --no-warn
824Suppress warning messages.
825
826@item --fatal-warnings
827Treat warnings as errors.
828
829@item --warn
830Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
831
832@item -w
833Ignored.
834
835@item -x
836Ignored.
837
838@item -Z
839Generate an object file even after errors.
840
841@item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
842Standard input, or source files to assemble.
843
844@end table
845@c man end
846
847@ifset AARCH64
848
849@ifclear man
850@xref{AArch64 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
851for the 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
852@end ifclear
853
854@ifset man
855@c man begin OPTIONS
856The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
85764-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
858@c man end
859@c man begin INCLUDE
860@include c-aarch64.texi
861@c ended inside the included file
862@end ifset
863
864@end ifset
865
866@ifset ALPHA
867
868@ifclear man
869@xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
870for an Alpha processor.
871@end ifclear
872
873@ifset man
874@c man begin OPTIONS
875The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha
876processor.
877@c man end
878@c man begin INCLUDE
879@include c-alpha.texi
880@c ended inside the included file
881@end ifset
882
883@end ifset
884
885@c man begin OPTIONS
886@ifset ARC
887The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an ARC
888processor.
889
890@table @gcctabopt
891@item -mcpu=@var{cpu}
892This option selects the core processor variant.
893@item -EB | -EL
894Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
895@item -mcode-density
896Enable Code Density extenssion instructions.
897@end table
898@end ifset
899
900@ifset ARM
901The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
902processor family.
903
904@table @gcctabopt
905@item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
906Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
907@item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
908Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
909@item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
910Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
911@item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
912Select which floating point ABI is in use.
913@item -mthumb
914Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
915@item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
916Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
917@item -EB | -EL
918Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
919@item -mthumb-interwork
920Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
921ARM code in mind.
922@item -mccs
923Turns on CodeComposer Studio assembly syntax compatibility mode.
924@item -k
925Specify that PIC code has been generated.
926@end table
927@end ifset
928@c man end
929
930@ifset Blackfin
931
932@ifclear man
933@xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
934configured for the Blackfin processor family.
935@end ifclear
936
937@ifset man
938@c man begin OPTIONS
939The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
940the Blackfin processor family.
941@c man end
942@c man begin INCLUDE
943@include c-bfin.texi
944@c ended inside the included file
945@end ifset
946
947@end ifset
948
949@c man begin OPTIONS
950@ifset CRIS
951See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
952@end ifset
953
954@ifset D10V
955The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
956a D10V processor.
957@table @gcctabopt
958@cindex D10V optimization
959@cindex optimization, D10V
960@item -O
961Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
962@end table
963@end ifset
964
965@ifset D30V
966The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
967processor.
968@table @gcctabopt
969@cindex D30V optimization
970@cindex optimization, D30V
971@item -O
972Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
973
974@cindex D30V nops
975@item -n
976Warn when nops are generated.
977
978@cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
979@item -N
980Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
981@end table
982@end ifset
983@c man end
984
985@ifset EPIPHANY
986The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
987Adapteva EPIPHANY series.
988
989@ifclear man
990@xref{Epiphany Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
991configured for an Epiphany processor.
992@end ifclear
993
994@ifset man
995@c man begin OPTIONS
996The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
997an Epiphany processor.
998@c man end
999@c man begin INCLUDE
1000@include c-epiphany.texi
1001@c ended inside the included file
1002@end ifset
1003
1004@end ifset
1005
1006@ifset H8300
1007
1008@ifclear man
1009@xref{H8/300 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1010for an H8/300 processor.
1011@end ifclear
1012
1013@ifset man
1014@c man begin OPTIONS
1015The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an H8/300
1016processor.
1017@c man end
1018@c man begin INCLUDE
1019@include c-h8300.texi
1020@c ended inside the included file
1021@end ifset
1022
1023@end ifset
1024
1025@ifset I80386
1026
1027@ifclear man
1028@xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1029configured for an i386 processor.
1030@end ifclear
1031
1032@ifset man
1033@c man begin OPTIONS
1034The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1035an i386 processor.
1036@c man end
1037@c man begin INCLUDE
1038@include c-i386.texi
1039@c ended inside the included file
1040@end ifset
1041
1042@end ifset
1043
1044@c man begin OPTIONS
1045@ifset I960
1046The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1047Intel 80960 processor.
1048
1049@table @gcctabopt
1050@item -ACA | -ACA_A | -ACB | -ACC | -AKA | -AKB | -AKC | -AMC
1051Specify which variant of the 960 architecture is the target.
1052
1053@item -b
1054Add code to collect statistics about branches taken.
1055
1056@item -no-relax
1057Do not alter compare-and-branch instructions for long displacements;
1058error if necessary.
1059
1060@end table
1061@end ifset
1062
1063@ifset IP2K
1064The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1065Ubicom IP2K series.
1066
1067@table @gcctabopt
1068
1069@item -mip2022ext
1070Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
1071
1072@item -mip2022
1073Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
1074just the basic IP2022 ones.
1075
1076@end table
1077@end ifset
1078
1079@ifset M32C
1080The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1081Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
1082
1083@table @gcctabopt
1084
1085@item -m32c
1086Assemble M32C instructions.
1087
1088@item -m16c
1089Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
1090
1091@item -relax
1092Enable support for link-time relaxations.
1093
1094@item -h-tick-hex
1095Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
1096
1097@end table
1098@end ifset
1099
1100@ifset M32R
1101The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1102Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
1103
1104@table @gcctabopt
1105
1106@item --m32rx
1107Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target.  The default
1108is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
1109
1110@item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
1111Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1112encountered.
1113
1114@item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
1115Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1116encountered.
1117
1118@end table
1119@end ifset
1120
1121@ifset M680X0
1122The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1123Motorola 68000 series.
1124
1125@table @gcctabopt
1126
1127@item -l
1128Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
1129
1130@item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
1131@itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
1132@itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
1133Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target.  The default
1134is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
1135
1136@item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
1137The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
1138The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32.  Although
1139the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
1140two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
1141coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
1142
1143@item -m68851 | -mno-68851
1144The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
1145unit coprocessor.  The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
1146
1147@end table
1148@end ifset
1149
1150@ifset NIOSII
1151
1152@ifclear man
1153@xref{Nios II Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1154for an Altera Nios II processor.
1155@end ifclear
1156
1157@ifset man
1158@c man begin OPTIONS
1159The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1160Altera Nios II processor.
1161@c man end
1162@c man begin INCLUDE
1163@include c-nios2.texi
1164@c ended inside the included file
1165@end ifset
1166@end ifset
1167
1168@ifset PDP11
1169
1170For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
1171see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
1172
1173@table @gcctabopt
1174@item -mpic | -mno-pic
1175Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code.  The
1176default is @option{-mpic}.
1177
1178@item -mall
1179@itemx -mall-extensions
1180Enable all instruction set extensions.  This is the default.
1181
1182@item -mno-extensions
1183Disable all instruction set extensions.
1184
1185@item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
1186Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
1187
1188@item -m@var{cpu}
1189Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
1190disable all other extensions.
1191
1192@item -m@var{machine}
1193Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
1194model, and disable all other extensions.
1195@end table
1196
1197@end ifset
1198
1199@ifset PJ
1200The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1201a picoJava processor.
1202
1203@table @gcctabopt
1204
1205@cindex PJ endianness
1206@cindex endianness, PJ
1207@cindex big endian output, PJ
1208@item -mb
1209Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1210
1211@cindex little endian output, PJ
1212@item -ml
1213Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1214
1215@end table
1216@end ifset
1217
1218@ifset M68HC11
1219The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1220Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
1221
1222@table @gcctabopt
1223
1224@item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12 | -mm9s12x | -mm9s12xg
1225Specify what processor is the target.  The default is
1226defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
1227
1228@item --xgate-ramoffset
1229Instruct the linker to offset RAM addresses from S12X address space into
1230XGATE address space.
1231
1232@item -mshort
1233Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
1234
1235@item -mlong
1236Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
1237
1238@item -mshort-double
1239Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
1240
1241@item -mlong-double
1242Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
1243
1244@item --force-long-branches
1245Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
1246conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
1247sub routine.
1248
1249@item -S | --short-branches
1250Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
1251when the offset is out of range.
1252
1253@item --strict-direct-mode
1254Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
1255when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
1256
1257@item --print-insn-syntax
1258Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
1259
1260@item --print-opcodes
1261Print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
1262
1263@item --generate-example
1264Print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
1265This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
1266
1267@end table
1268@end ifset
1269
1270@ifset SPARC
1271The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
1272for the SPARC architecture:
1273
1274@table @gcctabopt
1275@item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
1276@itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
1277Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
1278
1279@samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
1280@samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
1281
1282@samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
1283UltraSPARC extensions.
1284
1285@item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
1286For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler.  These options are
1287equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
1288
1289@item -bump
1290Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
1291@end table
1292@end ifset
1293
1294@ifset TIC54X
1295The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
1296architecture.
1297
1298@table @gcctabopt
1299@item -mfar-mode
1300Enable extended addressing mode.  All addresses and relocations will assume
1301extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
1302@item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
1303Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
1304@item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
1305Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
1306behaviour in the shell.
1307@end table
1308@end ifset
1309
1310@ifset MIPS
1311The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1312a MIPS processor.
1313
1314@table @gcctabopt
1315@item -G @var{num}
1316This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
1317implicitly with the @code{gp} register.  It is only accepted for targets that
1318use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix.  The default value is 8.
1319
1320@cindex MIPS endianness
1321@cindex endianness, MIPS
1322@cindex big endian output, MIPS
1323@item -EB
1324Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1325
1326@cindex little endian output, MIPS
1327@item -EL
1328Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1329
1330@cindex MIPS ISA
1331@item -mips1
1332@itemx -mips2
1333@itemx -mips3
1334@itemx -mips4
1335@itemx -mips5
1336@itemx -mips32
1337@itemx -mips32r2
1338@itemx -mips32r3
1339@itemx -mips32r5
1340@itemx -mips32r6
1341@itemx -mips64
1342@itemx -mips64r2
1343@itemx -mips64r3
1344@itemx -mips64r5
1345@itemx -mips64r6
1346Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture level.
1347@samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
1348alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
1349@samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
1350@samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips32r3},
1351@samp{-mips32r5}, @samp{-mips32r6}, @samp{-mips64}, @samp{-mips64r2},
1352@samp{-mips64r3}, @samp{-mips64r5}, and @samp{-mips64r6} correspond to generic
1353MIPS V, MIPS32, MIPS32 Release 2, MIPS32 Release 3, MIPS32 Release 5, MIPS32
1354Release 6, MIPS64, MIPS64 Release 2, MIPS64 Release 3, MIPS64 Release 5, and
1355MIPS64 Release 6 ISA processors, respectively.
1356
1357@item -march=@var{cpu}
1358Generate code for a particular MIPS CPU.
1359
1360@item -mtune=@var{cpu}
1361Schedule and tune for a particular MIPS CPU.
1362
1363@item -mfix7000
1364@itemx -mno-fix7000
1365Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
1366of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
1367
1368@item -mfix-rm7000
1369@itemx -mno-fix-rm7000
1370Cause nops to be inserted if a dmult or dmultu instruction is
1371followed by a load instruction.
1372
1373@item -mdebug
1374@itemx -no-mdebug
1375Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
1376section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
1377
1378@item -mpdr
1379@itemx -mno-pdr
1380Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
1381
1382@item -mgp32
1383@itemx -mfp32
1384The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1385flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
1386all times.  @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1387and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1388
1389@item -mgp64
1390@itemx -mfp64
1391The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1392flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 64 bits wide at
1393all times.  @samp{-mgp64} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1394and @samp{-mfp64} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1395
1396@item -mfpxx
1397The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but using
1398this flag in combination with @samp{-mabi=32} enables an ABI variant
1399which will operate correctly with floating-point registers which are
140032 or 64 bits wide.
1401
1402@item -modd-spreg
1403@itemx -mno-odd-spreg
1404Enable use of floating-point operations on odd-numbered single-precision
1405registers when supported by the ISA.  @samp{-mfpxx} implies
1406@samp{-mno-odd-spreg}, otherwise the default is @samp{-modd-spreg}.
1407
1408@item -mips16
1409@itemx -no-mips16
1410Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor.  This is equivalent to putting
1411@code{.set mips16} at the start of the assembly file.  @samp{-no-mips16}
1412turns off this option.
1413
1414@item -mmicromips
1415@itemx -mno-micromips
1416Generate code for the microMIPS processor.  This is equivalent to putting
1417@code{.set micromips} at the start of the assembly file.  @samp{-mno-micromips}
1418turns off this option.  This is equivalent to putting @code{.set nomicromips}
1419at the start of the assembly file.
1420
1421@item -msmartmips
1422@itemx -mno-smartmips
1423Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
1424equivalent to putting @code{.set smartmips} at the start of the assembly file.
1425@samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
1426
1427@item -mips3d
1428@itemx -no-mips3d
1429Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
1430This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
1431@samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
1432
1433@item -mdmx
1434@itemx -no-mdmx
1435Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
1436This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
1437@samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
1438
1439@item -mdsp
1440@itemx -mno-dsp
1441Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
1442This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
1443@samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
1444
1445@item -mdspr2
1446@itemx -mno-dspr2
1447Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
1448This option implies @samp{-mdsp}.
1449This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
1450@samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
1451
1452@item -mdspr3
1453@itemx -mno-dspr3
1454Generate code for the DSP Release 3 Application Specific Extension.
1455This option implies @samp{-mdsp} and @samp{-mdspr2}.
1456This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 3 instructions.
1457@samp{-mno-dspr3} turns off this option.
1458
1459@item -mmsa
1460@itemx -mno-msa
1461Generate code for the MIPS SIMD Architecture Extension.
1462This tells the assembler to accept MSA instructions.
1463@samp{-mno-msa} turns off this option.
1464
1465@item -mxpa
1466@itemx -mno-xpa
1467Generate code for the MIPS eXtended Physical Address (XPA) Extension.
1468This tells the assembler to accept XPA instructions.
1469@samp{-mno-xpa} turns off this option.
1470
1471@item -mmt
1472@itemx -mno-mt
1473Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
1474This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
1475@samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
1476
1477@item -mmcu
1478@itemx -mno-mcu
1479Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension.
1480This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions.
1481@samp{-mno-mcu} turns off this option.
1482
1483@item -minsn32
1484@itemx -mno-insn32
1485Only use 32-bit instruction encodings when generating code for the
1486microMIPS processor.  This option inhibits the use of any 16-bit
1487instructions.  This is equivalent to putting @code{.set insn32} at
1488the start of the assembly file.  @samp{-mno-insn32} turns off this
1489option.  This is equivalent to putting @code{.set noinsn32} at the
1490start of the assembly file.  By default @samp{-mno-insn32} is
1491selected, allowing all instructions to be used.
1492
1493@item --construct-floats
1494@itemx --no-construct-floats
1495The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
1496double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
1497value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
1498the double width register.  By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
1499selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
1500
1501@item --relax-branch
1502@itemx --no-relax-branch
1503The @samp{--relax-branch} option enables the relaxation of out-of-range
1504branches.  By default @samp{--no-relax-branch} is selected, causing any
1505out-of-range branches to produce an error.
1506
1507@item -mnan=@var{encoding}
1508Select between the IEEE 754-2008 (@option{-mnan=2008}) or the legacy
1509(@option{-mnan=legacy}) NaN encoding format.  The latter is the default.
1510
1511@cindex emulation
1512@item --emulation=@var{name}
1513This option was formerly used to switch between ELF and ECOFF output
1514on targets like IRIX 5 that supported both.  MIPS ECOFF support was
1515removed in GAS 2.24, so the option now serves little purpose.
1516It is retained for backwards compatibility.
1517
1518The available configuration names are: @samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslelf} and
1519@samp{mipsbelf}.  Choosing @samp{mipself} now has no effect, since the output
1520is always ELF.  @samp{mipslelf} and @samp{mipsbelf} select little- and
1521big-endian output respectively, but @samp{-EL} and @samp{-EB} are now the
1522preferred options instead.
1523
1524@item -nocpp
1525@command{@value{AS}} ignores this option.  It is accepted for compatibility with
1526the native tools.
1527
1528@item --trap
1529@itemx --no-trap
1530@itemx --break
1531@itemx --no-break
1532Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
1533@samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
1534(and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
1535@samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
1536break exception.
1537
1538@item -n
1539When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
1540time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
1541@end table
1542@end ifset
1543
1544@ifset MCORE
1545The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1546an MCore processor.
1547
1548@table @gcctabopt
1549@item -jsri2bsr
1550@itemx -nojsri2bsr
1551Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation.  By default this is enabled.
1552The command line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
1553
1554@item -sifilter
1555@itemx -nosifilter
1556Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour.  By default this is disabled.
1557The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command line option.
1558
1559@item -relax
1560Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
1561
1562@item -mcpu=[210|340]
1563Select the cpu type on the target hardware.  This controls which instructions
1564can be assembled.
1565
1566@item -EB
1567Assemble for a big endian target.
1568
1569@item -EL
1570Assemble for a little endian target.
1571
1572@end table
1573@end ifset
1574@c man end
1575
1576@ifset METAG
1577
1578@ifclear man
1579@xref{Meta Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1580for a Meta processor.
1581@end ifclear
1582
1583@ifset man
1584@c man begin OPTIONS
1585The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1586Meta processor.
1587@c man end
1588@c man begin INCLUDE
1589@include c-metag.texi
1590@c ended inside the included file
1591@end ifset
1592
1593@end ifset
1594
1595@c man begin OPTIONS
1596@ifset MMIX
1597See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
1598@end ifset
1599
1600@ifset NDS32
1601
1602@ifclear man
1603@xref{NDS32 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1604for a NDS32 processor.
1605@end ifclear
1606@c ended inside the included file
1607@end ifset
1608
1609@ifset man
1610@c man begin OPTIONS
1611The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1612NDS32 processor.
1613@c man end
1614@c man begin INCLUDE
1615@include c-nds32.texi
1616@c ended inside the included file
1617@end ifset
1618
1619@c man end
1620@ifset PPC
1621
1622@ifclear man
1623@xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1624for a PowerPC processor.
1625@end ifclear
1626
1627@ifset man
1628@c man begin OPTIONS
1629The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1630PowerPC processor.
1631@c man end
1632@c man begin INCLUDE
1633@include c-ppc.texi
1634@c ended inside the included file
1635@end ifset
1636
1637@end ifset
1638
1639@c man begin OPTIONS
1640@ifset RX
1641See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
1642@end ifset
1643
1644@ifset S390
1645The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
1646processor family.
1647
1648@table @gcctabopt
1649@item -m31
1650@itemx -m64
1651Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
1652@item -mesa
1653@item -mzarch
1654Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
1655Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
1656@item -march=@var{processor}
1657Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g6}, @samp{g6},
1658@samp{z900}, @samp{z990}, @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec}, @samp{z10},
1659@samp{z196}, @samp{zEC12}, or @samp{z13}.
1660@item -mregnames
1661@itemx -mno-regnames
1662Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
1663@item -mwarn-areg-zero
1664Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
1665but evaluates to zero.
1666@end table
1667@end ifset
1668@c man end
1669
1670@ifset TIC6X
1671
1672@ifclear man
1673@xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1674for a TMS320C6000 processor.
1675@end ifclear
1676
1677@ifset man
1678@c man begin OPTIONS
1679The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1680TMS320C6000 processor.
1681@c man end
1682@c man begin INCLUDE
1683@include c-tic6x.texi
1684@c ended inside the included file
1685@end ifset
1686
1687@end ifset
1688
1689@ifset TILEGX
1690
1691@ifclear man
1692@xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1693for a TILE-Gx processor.
1694@end ifclear
1695
1696@ifset man
1697@c man begin OPTIONS
1698The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx
1699processor.
1700@c man end
1701@c man begin INCLUDE
1702@include c-tilegx.texi
1703@c ended inside the included file
1704@end ifset
1705
1706@end ifset
1707
1708@ifset VISIUM
1709
1710@ifclear man
1711@xref{Visium Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1712for a Visium processor.
1713@end ifclear
1714
1715@ifset man
1716@c man begin OPTIONS
1717The following option is available when @value{AS} is configured for a Visium
1718processor.
1719@c man end
1720@c man begin INCLUDE
1721@include c-visium.texi
1722@c ended inside the included file
1723@end ifset
1724
1725@end ifset
1726
1727@ifset XTENSA
1728
1729@ifclear man
1730@xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1731for an Xtensa processor.
1732@end ifclear
1733
1734@ifset man
1735@c man begin OPTIONS
1736The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1737Xtensa processor.
1738@c man end
1739@c man begin INCLUDE
1740@include c-xtensa.texi
1741@c ended inside the included file
1742@end ifset
1743
1744@end ifset
1745
1746@c man begin OPTIONS
1747
1748@ifset Z80
1749The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1750a Z80 family processor.
1751@table @gcctabopt
1752@item -z80
1753Assemble for Z80 processor.
1754@item -r800
1755Assemble for R800 processor.
1756@item  -ignore-undocumented-instructions
1757@itemx -Wnud
1758Assemble undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800 without warning.
1759@item  -ignore-unportable-instructions
1760@itemx -Wnup
1761Assemble all undocumented Z80 instructions without warning.
1762@item  -warn-undocumented-instructions
1763@itemx -Wud
1764Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800.
1765@item  -warn-unportable-instructions
1766@itemx -Wup
1767Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800.
1768@item  -forbid-undocumented-instructions
1769@itemx -Fud
1770Treat all undocumented instructions as errors.
1771@item  -forbid-unportable-instructions
1772@itemx -Fup
1773Treat undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800 as errors.
1774@end table
1775@end ifset
1776
1777@c man end
1778
1779@menu
1780* Manual::                      Structure of this Manual
1781* GNU Assembler::               The GNU Assembler
1782* Object Formats::              Object File Formats
1783* Command Line::                Command Line
1784* Input Files::                 Input Files
1785* Object::                      Output (Object) File
1786* Errors::                      Error and Warning Messages
1787@end menu
1788
1789@node Manual
1790@section Structure of this Manual
1791
1792@cindex manual, structure and purpose
1793This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
1794@sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}.  We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
1795notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
1796@command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
1797
1798@ifclear GENERIC
1799We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
1800configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
1801@end ifclear
1802@ifset GENERIC
1803This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
1804various flavors of the assembler.
1805@end ifset
1806
1807@cindex machine instructions (not covered)
1808On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
1809to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
1810In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
1811architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
1812mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
1813particular architecture.
1814@ifset GENERIC
1815You may want to consult the manufacturer's
1816machine architecture manual for this information.
1817@end ifset
1818@ifclear GENERIC
1819@ifset H8/300
1820For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
1821Series Programming Manual}.  For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
1822Programming Manual} (Renesas).
1823@end ifset
1824@ifset SH
1825For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
1826see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
1827@cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
1828@cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
1829@end ifset
1830@ifset Z8000
1831For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
1832@end ifset
1833@end ifclear
1834
1835@c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991
1836@ignore
1837Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
1838the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
1839Foundation, Inc.}.  This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
1840computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
1841once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
1842qualification.
1843
1844@command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
1845human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
1846computer-readable series of instructions.  Different versions of
1847@command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
1848@end ignore
1849
1850@c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
1851@c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long".  Defining "word" to any
1852@c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
1853@c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
1854@c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
1855@c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
1856@c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
1857@c directives).
1858
1859@node GNU Assembler
1860@section The GNU Assembler
1861
1862@c man begin DESCRIPTION
1863
1864@sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
1865@ifclear GENERIC
1866This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
1867configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
1868@end ifclear
1869If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
1870should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
1871architecture.  Each version has much in common with the others,
1872including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
1873@dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
1874
1875@cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
1876@command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
1877@sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
1878@code{@value{LD}}.  Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
1879assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
1880machine would assemble.
1881@ifset VAX
1882Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
1883@end ifset
1884@ifset M680X0
1885@c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
1886@c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
1887This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
1888assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
1889incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
1890@end ifset
1891
1892@c man end
1893
1894Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
1895program in one pass of the source file.  This has a subtle impact on the
1896@kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
1897
1898@node Object Formats
1899@section Object File Formats
1900
1901@cindex object file format
1902The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
1903object file formats.  For the most part, this does not affect how you
1904write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
1905are typically different in different file formats.  @xref{Symbol
1906Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
1907@ifclear GENERIC
1908@ifclear MULTI-OBJ
1909For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
1910@value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
1911@end ifclear
1912@c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
1913@ifset I960
1914On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1915@code{b.out} or COFF format object files.
1916@end ifset
1917@ifset HPPA
1918On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1919SOM or ELF format object files.
1920@end ifset
1921@end ifclear
1922
1923@node Command Line
1924@section Command Line
1925
1926@cindex command line conventions
1927
1928After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
1929options and file names.  Options may appear in any order, and may be
1930before, after, or between file names.  The order of file names is
1931significant.
1932
1933@cindex standard input, as input file
1934@kindex --
1935@file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
1936explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
1937
1938@cindex options, command line
1939Except for @samp{--} any command line argument that begins with a
1940hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option.  Each option changes the behavior of
1941@command{@value{AS}}.  No option changes the way another option works.  An
1942option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
1943the letter is important.   All options are optional.
1944
1945Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them.  The file
1946name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
1947with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
1948standard).  These two command lines are equivalent:
1949
1950@smallexample
1951@value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
1952@value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
1953@end smallexample
1954
1955@node Input Files
1956@section Input Files
1957
1958@cindex input
1959@cindex source program
1960@cindex files, input
1961We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
1962describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}.  The program may
1963be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
1964doesn't change the meaning of the source.
1965
1966@c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
1967@c APL training...   doc@cygnus.com
1968The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
1969order specified.
1970
1971@c man begin DESCRIPTION
1972Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
1973program.  The source program is made up of one or more files.
1974(The standard input is also a file.)
1975
1976You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
1977names.  The input files are read (from left file name to right).  A
1978command line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
1979is taken to be an input file name.
1980
1981If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
1982from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal.  You
1983may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
1984to assemble.
1985
1986Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
1987in your command line.
1988
1989If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
1990file.
1991
1992@c man end
1993
1994@subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
1995
1996@cindex input file linenumbers
1997@cindex line numbers, in input files
1998There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
1999either may be used in reporting error messages.  One way refers to a line
2000number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
2001``logical'' file.  @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
2002
2003@dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
2004to @command{@value{AS}}.
2005
2006@dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
2007directives; they bear no relation to physical files.  Logical file names help
2008error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
2009is itself synthesized from other files.  @command{@value{AS}} understands the
2010@samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor.  See also
2011@ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
2012
2013@node Object
2014@section Output (Object) File
2015
2016@cindex object file
2017@cindex output file
2018@kindex a.out
2019@kindex .o
2020Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
2021your assembly language program translated into numbers.  This file
2022is the object file.  Its default name is
2023@ifclear BOUT
2024@code{a.out}.
2025@end ifclear
2026@ifset BOUT
2027@ifset GENERIC
2028@code{a.out}, or
2029@end ifset
2030@code{b.out} when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for the Intel 80960.
2031@end ifset
2032You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option.  Conventionally,
2033object file names end with @file{.o}.  The default name is used for historical
2034reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
2035directly into a runnable program.  (For some formats, this isn't currently
2036possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
2037
2038@cindex linker
2039@kindex ld
2040The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}.  It contains
2041assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
2042the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
2043information for the debugger.
2044
2045@c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
2046@c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
2047
2048@node Errors
2049@section Error and Warning Messages
2050
2051@c man begin DESCRIPTION
2052
2053@cindex error messages
2054@cindex warning messages
2055@cindex messages from assembler
2056@command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
2057file (usually your terminal).  This should not happen when  a compiler
2058runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically.  Warnings report an assumption made so
2059that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
2060grave problem that stops the assembly.
2061
2062@c man end
2063
2064@cindex format of warning messages
2065Warning messages have the format
2066
2067@smallexample
2068file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
2069@end smallexample
2070
2071@noindent
2072@cindex file names and line numbers, in warnings/errors
2073(where @b{NNN} is a line number).  If both a logical file name
2074(@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) and a logical line number
2075@ifset GENERIC
2076(@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
2077@end ifset
2078have been given then they will be used, otherwise the file name and line number
2079in the current assembler source file will be used.  The message text is
2080intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix tradition).
2081
2082Note the file name must be set via the logical version of the @code{.file}
2083directive, not the DWARF2 version of the @code{.file} directive.  For example:
2084
2085@smallexample
2086  .file 2 "bar.c"
2087     error_assembler_source
2088  .file "foo.c"
2089  .line 30
2090      error_c_source
2091@end smallexample
2092
2093produces this output:
2094
2095@smallexample
2096  Assembler messages:
2097  asm.s:2: Error: no such instruction: `error_assembler_source'
2098  foo.c:31: Error: no such instruction: `error_c_source'
2099@end smallexample
2100
2101@cindex format of error messages
2102Error messages have the format
2103
2104@smallexample
2105file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
2106@end smallexample
2107
2108The file name and line number are derived as for warning
2109messages.  The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
2110because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
2111
2112@node Invoking
2113@chapter Command-Line Options
2114
2115@cindex options, all versions of assembler
2116This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
2117versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
2118for options specific
2119@ifclear GENERIC
2120to the @value{TARGET} target.
2121@end ifclear
2122@ifset GENERIC
2123to particular machine architectures.
2124@end ifset
2125
2126@c man begin DESCRIPTION
2127
2128If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
2129you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
2130The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
2131by commas.  For example:
2132
2133@smallexample
2134gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
2135@end smallexample
2136
2137@noindent
2138This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
2139standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
2140local symbols in the symbol table).
2141
2142Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
2143command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
2144(You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
2145precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
2146assembler.)
2147
2148@c man end
2149
2150@menu
2151* a::             -a[cdghlns] enable listings
2152* alternate::     --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
2153* D::             -D for compatibility
2154* f::             -f to work faster
2155* I::             -I for .include search path
2156@ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2157* K::             -K for compatibility
2158@end ifclear
2159@ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2160* K::             -K for difference tables
2161@end ifset
2162
2163* L::             -L to retain local symbols
2164* listing::       --listing-XXX to configure listing output
2165* M::		  -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
2166* MD::            --MD for dependency tracking
2167* no-pad-sections:: --no-pad-sections to stop section padding
2168* o::             -o to name the object file
2169* R::             -R to join data and text sections
2170* statistics::    --statistics to see statistics about assembly
2171* traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
2172* v::             -v to announce version
2173* W::             -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
2174* Z::             -Z to make object file even after errors
2175@end menu
2176
2177@node a
2178@section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
2179
2180@kindex -a
2181@kindex -ac
2182@kindex -ad
2183@kindex -ag
2184@kindex -ah
2185@kindex -al
2186@kindex -an
2187@kindex -as
2188@cindex listings, enabling
2189@cindex assembly listings, enabling
2190
2191These options enable listing output from the assembler.  By itself,
2192@samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
2193You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
2194@samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
2195@samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
2196@samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
2197High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
2198@samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
2199also.
2200
2201Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
2202information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
2203
2204Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing.  Any lines
2205which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
2206other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
2207omitted from the listing.
2208
2209Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
2210listing.
2211
2212Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
2213listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
2214@code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
2215@code{.sbttl}.
2216The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
2217If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
2218listing-control directives have no effect.
2219
2220The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
2221@emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
2222
2223Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
2224because it
2225is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command line switch
2226is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
2227directives.  This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
2228stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler.  This reduces
2229memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
2230
2231@node alternate
2232@section @option{--alternate}
2233
2234@kindex --alternate
2235Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
2236
2237@node D
2238@section @option{-D}
2239
2240@kindex -D
2241This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
2242likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
2243@command{@value{AS}}.
2244
2245@node f
2246@section Work Faster: @option{-f}
2247
2248@kindex -f
2249@cindex trusted compiler
2250@cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
2251@samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
2252(trusted) compiler.  @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
2253and comment preprocessing on
2254the input file(s) before assembling them.  @xref{Preprocessing,
2255,Preprocessing}.
2256
2257@quotation
2258@emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
2259preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
2260not work correctly.
2261@end quotation
2262
2263@node I
2264@section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
2265
2266@kindex -I @var{path}
2267@cindex paths for @code{.include}
2268@cindex search path for @code{.include}
2269@cindex @code{include} directive search path
2270Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
2271@command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
2272directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}).  You may use @option{-I} as
2273many times as necessary to include a variety of paths.  The current
2274working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
2275searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
2276specified (left to right) on the command line.
2277
2278@node K
2279@section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
2280
2281@kindex -K
2282@ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2283On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect.  It is
2284permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
2285where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
2286generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables.  The @value{TARGET}
2287family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
2288alteration on other platforms.
2289@end ifclear
2290
2291@ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2292@cindex difference tables, warning
2293@cindex warning for altered difference tables
2294@command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
2295form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}.  @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
2296You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
2297is done.
2298@end ifset
2299
2300@node L
2301@section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
2302
2303@kindex -L
2304@cindex local symbols, retaining in output
2305Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
2306@samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
2307called @dfn{local symbols}.  @xref{Symbol Names}.  Normally you do not see
2308such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
2309programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
2310notice.  Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
2311such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
2312
2313This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
2314in the object file.  Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
2315@code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
2316
2317@node listing
2318@section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
2319
2320The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command line switch
2321@samp{-a} (@pxref{a}).  This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
2322hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
2323them as a listing file.  The format of this listing can be controlled by
2324directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
2325@code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
2326@code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
2327@code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
2328
2329@table @gcctabopt
2330@item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
2331@kindex --listing-lhs-width
2332@cindex Width of first line disassembly output
2333Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump.  This
2334dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
2335
2336@item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
2337@kindex --listing-lhs-width2
2338@cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
2339Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
2340a given input source line.  If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
2341the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}.  If neither
2342switch is used the default is to one.
2343
2344@item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
2345@kindex --listing-rhs-width
2346@cindex Width of source line output
2347Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
2348alongside the hex dump.  The default value for this parameter is 100.  The
2349source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
2350
2351@item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
2352@kindex --listing-cont-lines
2353@cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
2354Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
2355displayed for a given single line of source input.  The default value is 4.
2356@end table
2357
2358@node M
2359@section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
2360
2361@kindex -M
2362@cindex MRI compatibility mode
2363The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode.  This
2364changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
2365compatible with the @code{ASM68K} or the @code{ASM960} (depending upon the
2366configured target) assembler from Microtec Research.  The exact nature of the
2367MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
2368information.  Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
2369arguments is somewhat different.  The purpose of this option is to permit
2370assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
2371
2372The MRI compatibility is not complete.  Certain operations of the MRI assembler
2373depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
2374file formats.  Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
2375individually.  These are:
2376
2377@itemize @bullet
2378@item global symbols in common section
2379
2380The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
2381Other object file formats do not support this.  @command{@value{AS}} handles
2382common sections by treating them as a single common symbol.  It permits local
2383symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
2384symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
2385
2386@item complex relocations
2387
2388The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
2389relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections.  These
2390are not support by other object file formats.
2391
2392@item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
2393
2394The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
2395This is not supported by other object file formats.  The start address may
2396instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
2397script.
2398
2399@item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
2400
2401The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
2402name to the output file.  This is not supported by other object file formats.
2403
2404@item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
2405
2406The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
2407address.  This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
2408which changes the location within the current section.  Absolute sections are
2409not supported by other object file formats.  The address of a section may be
2410assigned within a linker script.
2411@end itemize
2412
2413There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
2414@command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
2415seem of little consequence.  Some of these may be supported in future releases.
2416
2417@itemize @bullet
2418
2419@item EBCDIC strings
2420
2421EBCDIC strings are not supported.
2422
2423@item packed binary coded decimal
2424
2425Packed binary coded decimal is not supported.  This means that the @code{DC.P}
2426and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
2427
2428@item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
2429
2430The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
2431
2432@item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
2433
2434The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
2435
2436@item @code{OPT} branch control options
2437
2438The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
2439@code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored.  @command{@value{AS}} automatically
2440relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
2441these options serve no purpose.
2442
2443@item @code{OPT} list control options
2444
2445The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
2446@code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
2447@code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
2448
2449@item other @code{OPT} options
2450
2451The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
2452@code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
2453
2454@item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
2455
2456The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
2457@code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
2458
2459@item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
2460
2461The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
2462
2463@item @code{.debug} pseudo-op
2464
2465The i960 @code{.debug} pseudo-op is not supported.
2466
2467@item @code{.extended} pseudo-op
2468
2469The i960 @code{.extended} pseudo-op is not supported.
2470
2471@item @code{.list} pseudo-op.
2472
2473The various options of the i960 @code{.list} pseudo-op are not supported.
2474
2475@item @code{.optimize} pseudo-op
2476
2477The i960 @code{.optimize} pseudo-op is not supported.
2478
2479@item @code{.output} pseudo-op
2480
2481The i960 @code{.output} pseudo-op is not supported.
2482
2483@item @code{.setreal} pseudo-op
2484
2485The i960 @code{.setreal} pseudo-op is not supported.
2486
2487@end itemize
2488
2489@node MD
2490@section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
2491
2492@kindex --MD
2493@cindex dependency tracking
2494@cindex make rules
2495
2496@command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates.  This
2497file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
2498dependencies of the main source file.
2499
2500The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
2501
2502This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
2503
2504@node no-pad-sections
2505@section Output Section Padding
2506@kindex --no-pad-sections
2507@cindex output section padding
2508Normally the assembler will pad the end of each output section up to its
2509alignment boundary.  But this can waste space, which can be significant on
2510memory constrained targets.  So the @option{--no-pad-sections} option will
2511disable this behaviour.
2512
2513@node o
2514@section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
2515
2516@kindex -o
2517@cindex naming object file
2518@cindex object file name
2519There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}.  By
2520default it has the name
2521@ifset GENERIC
2522@ifset I960
2523@file{a.out} (or @file{b.out}, for Intel 960 targets only).
2524@end ifset
2525@ifclear I960
2526@file{a.out}.
2527@end ifclear
2528@end ifset
2529@ifclear GENERIC
2530@ifset I960
2531@file{b.out}.
2532@end ifset
2533@ifclear I960
2534@file{a.out}.
2535@end ifclear
2536@end ifclear
2537You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
2538object file a different name.
2539
2540Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
2541existing file of the same name.
2542
2543@node R
2544@section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
2545
2546@kindex -R
2547@cindex data and text sections, joining
2548@cindex text and data sections, joining
2549@cindex joining text and data sections
2550@cindex merging text and data sections
2551@option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
2552data-section data lives in the text section.  This is only done at
2553the very last moment:  your binary data are the same, but data
2554section parts are relocated differently.  The data section part of
2555your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
2556appended to the text section.  (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
2557
2558When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
2559address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
2560data section).  We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
2561older versions of @command{@value{AS}}.  In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
2562
2563@ifset COFF-ELF
2564When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
2565this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
2566@samp{.data}.
2567@end ifset
2568
2569@ifset HPPA
2570@option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets.  Using
2571@option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
2572@end ifset
2573
2574@node statistics
2575@section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
2576
2577@kindex --statistics
2578@cindex statistics, about assembly
2579@cindex time, total for assembly
2580@cindex space used, maximum for assembly
2581Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
2582@command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
2583(in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
2584seconds).
2585
2586@node traditional-format
2587@section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
2588
2589@kindex --traditional-format
2590For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
2591from the output of some existing assembler.  This switch requests
2592@command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
2593
2594For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
2595@command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
2596
2597@node v
2598@section Announce Version: @option{-v}
2599
2600@kindex -v
2601@kindex -version
2602@cindex assembler version
2603@cindex version of assembler
2604You can find out what version of as is running by including the
2605option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
2606command line.
2607
2608@node W
2609@section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
2610
2611@command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
2612assembling compiler output.  But programs written by people often
2613cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
2614made.  All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
2615
2616@kindex -W
2617@kindex --no-warn
2618@cindex suppressing warnings
2619@cindex warnings, suppressing
2620If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
2621This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
2622how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file.  Errors, which stop the assembly,
2623are still reported.
2624
2625@kindex --fatal-warnings
2626@cindex errors, caused by warnings
2627@cindex warnings, causing error
2628If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
2629files that generate warnings to be in error.
2630
2631@kindex --warn
2632@cindex warnings, switching on
2633You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
2634causes warnings to be output as usual.
2635
2636@node Z
2637@section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
2638@cindex object file, after errors
2639@cindex errors, continuing after
2640After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output.  If for
2641some reason you are interested in object file output even after
2642@command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
2643option.  If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
2644writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
2645errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
2646
2647@node Syntax
2648@chapter Syntax
2649
2650@cindex machine-independent syntax
2651@cindex syntax, machine-independent
2652This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
2653source file.  @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
2654assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
2655@ifclear VAX
2656assembler.
2657@end ifclear
2658@ifset VAX
2659assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
2660@end ifset
2661
2662@menu
2663* Preprocessing::               Preprocessing
2664* Whitespace::                  Whitespace
2665* Comments::                    Comments
2666* Symbol Intro::                Symbols
2667* Statements::                  Statements
2668* Constants::                   Constants
2669@end menu
2670
2671@node Preprocessing
2672@section Preprocessing
2673
2674@cindex preprocessing
2675The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
2676@itemize @bullet
2677@cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
2678@item
2679adjusts and removes extra whitespace.  It leaves one space or tab before
2680the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
2681a single space.
2682
2683@cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
2684@item
2685removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
2686appropriate number of newlines.
2687
2688@cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
2689@item
2690converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
2691@end itemize
2692
2693It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
2694anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor.  You can
2695do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
2696(@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}).  You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
2697to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
2698@samp{.S} suffix.  @xref{Overall Options, ,Options Controlling the Kind of
2699Output, gcc info, Using GNU CC}.
2700
2701Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
2702cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
2703preprocessed.
2704
2705@cindex turning preprocessing on and off
2706@cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
2707@kindex #NO_APP
2708@kindex #APP
2709If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
2710@samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
2711Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
2712specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
2713text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
2714@code{#NO_APP} after this text.  This feature is mainly intend to support
2715@code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
2716and whitespace.
2717
2718@node Whitespace
2719@section Whitespace
2720
2721@cindex whitespace
2722@dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
2723Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
2724people to read.  Unless within character constants
2725(@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
2726as exactly one space.
2727
2728@node Comments
2729@section Comments
2730
2731@cindex comments
2732There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}.  In both
2733cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
2734
2735Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
2736This means you may not nest these comments.
2737
2738@smallexample
2739/*
2740  The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
2741  is to use this sort of comment.
2742*/
2743
2744/* This sort of comment does not nest. */
2745@end smallexample
2746
2747@cindex line comment character
2748Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is
2749considered a comment and is ignored.  The line comment character is target
2750specific, and some targets multiple comment characters.  Some targets also have
2751line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a
2752line.  Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line
2753comment.  Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending
2754upon command line options that have been used.  For more details see the
2755@emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets.
2756
2757If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the
2758special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and
2759to specify logical line numbers:
2760
2761@kindex #
2762@cindex lines starting with @code{#}
2763@cindex logical line numbers
2764To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
2765special interpretation.  Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
2766expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
2767line.  Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
2768new logical file name.  The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
2769
2770If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
2771the line is ignored.  (Just like a comment.)
2772
2773@smallexample
2774                          # This is an ordinary comment.
2775# 42-6 "new_file_name"    # New logical file name
2776                          # This is logical line # 36.
2777@end smallexample
2778This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
2779of @command{@value{AS}}.
2780
2781@node Symbol Intro
2782@section Symbols
2783
2784@cindex characters used in symbols
2785@ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
2786A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2787letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2788@samp{_.$}.
2789@end ifclear
2790@ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
2791@ifclear GENERIC
2792@ifset H8
2793A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2794letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2795@samp{._$}.  (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
2796symbol names.)
2797@end ifset
2798@end ifclear
2799@end ifset
2800@ifset GENERIC
2801On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
2802are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
2803@end ifset
2804No symbol may begin with a digit.  Case is significant.
2805There is no length limit; all characters are significant.  Multibyte characters
2806are supported.  Symbols are delimited by characters not in that set, or by the
2807beginning of a file (since the source program must end with a newline, the end
2808of a file is not a possible symbol delimiter).  @xref{Symbols}.
2809
2810Symbol names may also be enclosed in double quote @code{"} characters.  In such
2811cases any characters are allowed, except for the NUL character.  If a double
2812quote character is to be included in the symbol name it must be preceeded by a
2813backslash @code{\} character.
2814@cindex length of symbols
2815
2816@node Statements
2817@section Statements
2818
2819@cindex statements, structure of
2820@cindex line separator character
2821@cindex statement separator character
2822
2823A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a
2824@dfn{line separator character}.  The line separator character is target
2825specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each
2826target's documentation.  Not all targets support a line separator character.
2827The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the
2828preceding statement.  Newlines and separators within character constants are an
2829exception: they do not end statements.
2830
2831@cindex newline, required at file end
2832@cindex EOF, newline must precede
2833It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file:  the last
2834character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
2835
2836An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace.  It is ignored.
2837
2838@cindex instructions and directives
2839@cindex directives and instructions
2840@c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
2841@c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously...  doc@cygnus.com,
2842@c 13feb91.
2843A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
2844key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is.  The key
2845symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement.  If the
2846symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
2847directive: typically valid for any computer.  If the symbol begins with
2848a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
2849assembles into a machine language instruction.
2850@ifset GENERIC
2851Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
2852recognize different instructions.  In fact, the same symbol may
2853represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
2854language.@refill
2855@end ifset
2856
2857@cindex @code{:} (label)
2858@cindex label (@code{:})
2859A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
2860Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
2861have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
2862
2863@ifset HPPA
2864For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
2865the definition of a label must begin in column zero.  This also implies that
2866only one label may be defined on each line.
2867@end ifset
2868
2869@smallexample
2870label:     .directive    followed by something
2871another_label:           # This is an empty statement.
2872           instruction   operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
2873@end smallexample
2874
2875@node Constants
2876@section Constants
2877
2878@cindex constants
2879A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
2880inspection, without knowing any context.  Like this:
2881@smallexample
2882@group
2883.byte  74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
2884.ascii "Ring the bell\7"                  # A string constant.
2885.octa  0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
2886.float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
288795028841971.693993751E-40                 # - pi, a flonum.
2888@end group
2889@end smallexample
2890
2891@menu
2892* Characters::                  Character Constants
2893* Numbers::                     Number Constants
2894@end menu
2895
2896@node Characters
2897@subsection Character Constants
2898
2899@cindex character constants
2900@cindex constants, character
2901There are two kinds of character constants.  A @dfn{character} stands
2902for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
2903numeric expressions.  String constants (properly called string
2904@emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
2905used in arithmetic expressions.
2906
2907@menu
2908* Strings::                     Strings
2909* Chars::                       Characters
2910@end menu
2911
2912@node Strings
2913@subsubsection Strings
2914
2915@cindex string constants
2916@cindex constants, string
2917A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes.  It may contain
2918double-quotes or null characters.  The way to get special characters
2919into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
2920a backslash @samp{\} character.  For example @samp{\\} represents
2921one backslash:  the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
2922@command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
2923(which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
2924escape character).  The complete list of escapes follows.
2925
2926@cindex escape codes, character
2927@cindex character escape codes
2928@c NOTE: Cindex entries must not start with a backlash character.
2929@c NOTE: This confuses the pdf2texi script when it is creating the
2930@c NOTE: index based upon the first character and so it generates:
2931@c NOTE:   \initial {\\}
2932@c NOTE: which then results in the error message:
2933@c NOTE:   Argument of \\ has an extra }.
2934@c NOTE: So in the index entries below a space character has been
2935@c NOTE: prepended to avoid this problem.
2936@table @kbd
2937@c      @item \a
2938@c      Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
2939@c
2940@cindex @code{ \b} (backspace character)
2941@cindex backspace (@code{\b})
2942@item \b
2943Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
2944
2945@c      @item \e
2946@c      Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
2947@c
2948@cindex @code{ \f} (formfeed character)
2949@cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
2950@item backslash-f
2951Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
2952
2953@cindex @code{ \n} (newline character)
2954@cindex newline (@code{\n})
2955@item \n
2956Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
2957
2958@c      @item \p
2959@c      Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
2960@c
2961@cindex @code{ \r} (carriage return character)
2962@cindex carriage return (@code{backslash-r})
2963@item \r
2964Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
2965
2966@c      @item \s
2967@c      Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040.  Included for compliance with
2968@c      other assemblers.
2969@c
2970@cindex @code{ \t} (tab)
2971@cindex tab (@code{\t})
2972@item \t
2973Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
2974
2975@c      @item \v
2976@c      Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
2977@c      @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2978@c      A hexadecimal character code.  The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
2979@c
2980@cindex @code{ \@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
2981@cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
2982@item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2983An octal character code.  The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
2984For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
2985for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
2986
2987@cindex @code{ \@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
2988@cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
2989@item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
2990A hex character code.  All trailing hex digits are combined.  Either upper or
2991lower case @code{x} works.
2992
2993@cindex @code{ \\} (@samp{\} character)
2994@cindex backslash (@code{\\})
2995@item \\
2996Represents one @samp{\} character.
2997
2998@c      @item \'
2999@c      Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
3000@c      This is needed in single character literals
3001@c      (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
3002@c      a @samp{'}.
3003@c
3004@cindex @code{ \"} (doublequote character)
3005@cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
3006@item \"
3007Represents one @samp{"} character.  Needed in strings to represent
3008this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
3009
3010@item \ @var{anything-else}
3011Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
3012assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present.  The idea is that if
3013you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
3014interpretation of the following character.  However @command{@value{AS}} has no
3015other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
3016code and warns you of the fact.
3017@end table
3018
3019Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
3020varies widely among assemblers.  The current set is what we think
3021the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
3022compilers recognize.  If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
3023sequence.
3024
3025@node Chars
3026@subsubsection Characters
3027
3028@cindex single character constant
3029@cindex character, single
3030@cindex constant, single character
3031A single character may be written as a single quote immediately
3032followed by that character.  The same escapes apply to characters as
3033to strings.  So if you want to write the character backslash, you
3034must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes the second
3035@code{\}.  As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a
3036grave accent.  A newline
3037@ifclear GENERIC
3038@ifclear abnormal-separator
3039(or semicolon @samp{;})
3040@end ifclear
3041@ifset abnormal-separator
3042@ifset H8
3043(or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
3044Renesas SH)
3045@end ifset
3046@end ifset
3047@end ifclear
3048immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
3049and does not count as the end of a statement.  The value of a character
3050constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
3051that character.  @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
3052@kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
3053
3054@node Numbers
3055@subsection Number Constants
3056
3057@cindex constants, number
3058@cindex number constants
3059@command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
3060are stored in the target machine.  @emph{Integers} are numbers that
3061would fit into an @code{int} in the C language.  @emph{Bignums} are
3062integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits.  @emph{Flonums}
3063are floating point numbers, described below.
3064
3065@menu
3066* Integers::                    Integers
3067* Bignums::                     Bignums
3068* Flonums::                     Flonums
3069@ifclear GENERIC
3070@ifset I960
3071* Bit Fields::                  Bit Fields
3072@end ifset
3073@end ifclear
3074@end menu
3075
3076@node Integers
3077@subsubsection Integers
3078@cindex integers
3079@cindex constants, integer
3080
3081@cindex binary integers
3082@cindex integers, binary
3083A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
3084the binary digits @samp{01}.
3085
3086@cindex octal integers
3087@cindex integers, octal
3088An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
3089digits (@samp{01234567}).
3090
3091@cindex decimal integers
3092@cindex integers, decimal
3093A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
3094more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
3095
3096@cindex hexadecimal integers
3097@cindex integers, hexadecimal
3098A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
3099more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
3100
3101Integers have the usual values.  To denote a negative integer, use
3102the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
3103(@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
3104
3105@node Bignums
3106@subsubsection Bignums
3107
3108@cindex bignums
3109@cindex constants, bignum
3110A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
3111except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
3112represent in binary.  The distinction is made because in some places
3113integers are permitted while bignums are not.
3114
3115@node Flonums
3116@subsubsection Flonums
3117@cindex flonums
3118@cindex floating point numbers
3119@cindex constants, floating point
3120
3121@cindex precision, floating point
3122A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number.  The translation is
3123indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
3124@command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
3125sufficient precision.  This generic floating point number is converted
3126to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
3127portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
3128
3129A flonum is written by writing (in order)
3130@itemize @bullet
3131@item
3132The digit @samp{0}.
3133@ifset HPPA
3134(@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
3135@end ifset
3136
3137@item
3138A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
3139@ifset GENERIC
3140@kbd{e} is recommended.  Case is not important.
3141@ignore
3142@c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
3143(Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed.  Vax BSD
31444.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
3145@end ignore
3146
3147On the H8/300, Renesas / SuperH SH,
3148and AMD 29K architectures, the letter must be
3149one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3150
3151On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
3152(in upper or lower case).
3153
3154On the Intel 960 architecture, the letter must be
3155one of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
3156
3157On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
3158@end ifset
3159@ifclear GENERIC
3160@ifset ARC
3161One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
3162@end ifset
3163@ifset H8
3164One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3165@end ifset
3166@ifset HPPA
3167The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
3168@end ifset
3169@ifset I960
3170One of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
3171@end ifset
3172@end ifclear
3173
3174@item
3175An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3176
3177@item
3178An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
3179
3180@item
3181An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
3182or more decimal digits.
3183
3184@item
3185An optional exponent, consisting of:
3186
3187@itemize @bullet
3188@item
3189An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
3190@c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
3191@c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
3192@item
3193Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3194@item
3195One or more decimal digits.
3196@end itemize
3197
3198@end itemize
3199
3200At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
3201present.  The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
3202
3203@command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers.  Flonums are computed
3204independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
3205@command{@value{AS}}.
3206
3207@ifclear GENERIC
3208@ifset I960
3209@c Bit fields are written as a general facility but are also controlled
3210@c by a conditional-compilation flag---which is as of now (21mar91)
3211@c turned on only by the i960 config of GAS.
3212@node Bit Fields
3213@subsubsection Bit Fields
3214
3215@cindex bit fields
3216@cindex constants, bit field
3217You can also define numeric constants as @dfn{bit fields}.
3218Specify two numbers separated by a colon---
3219@example
3220@var{mask}:@var{value}
3221@end example
3222@noindent
3223@command{@value{AS}} applies a bitwise @sc{and} between @var{mask} and
3224@var{value}.
3225
3226The resulting number is then packed
3227@ifset GENERIC
3228@c this conditional paren in case bit fields turned on elsewhere than 960
3229(in host-dependent byte order)
3230@end ifset
3231into a field whose width depends on which assembler directive has the
3232bit-field as its argument.  Overflow (a result from the bitwise and
3233requiring more binary digits to represent) is not an error; instead,
3234more constants are generated, of the specified width, beginning with the
3235least significant digits.@refill
3236
3237The directives @code{.byte}, @code{.hword}, @code{.int}, @code{.long},
3238@code{.short}, and @code{.word} accept bit-field arguments.
3239@end ifset
3240@end ifclear
3241
3242@node Sections
3243@chapter Sections and Relocation
3244@cindex sections
3245@cindex relocation
3246
3247@menu
3248* Secs Background::             Background
3249* Ld Sections::                 Linker Sections
3250* As Sections::                 Assembler Internal Sections
3251* Sub-Sections::                Sub-Sections
3252* bss::                         bss Section
3253@end menu
3254
3255@node Secs Background
3256@section Background
3257
3258Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
3259``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
3260For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
3261
3262@cindex linker, and assembler
3263@cindex assembler, and linker
3264The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
3265combines their contents to form a runnable program.  When @command{@value{AS}}
3266emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
3267@code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
3268different partial programs do not overlap.  This is actually an
3269oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
3270sections.
3271
3272@code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
3273addresses.  These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
3274units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
3275within them.  Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}.  Assigning
3276run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}.  It includes
3277the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
3278the proper run-time addresses.
3279@ifset H8
3280For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
3281@command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
3282ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
3283@end ifset
3284
3285@cindex standard assembler sections
3286An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
3287of which may be empty.  These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
3288@dfn{bss} sections.
3289
3290@ifset COFF-ELF
3291@ifset GENERIC
3292When it generates COFF or ELF output,
3293@end ifset
3294@command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
3295using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
3296If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
3297or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
3298@end ifset
3299
3300@ifset HPPA
3301@ifset GENERIC
3302When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
3303@end ifset
3304@command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
3305specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives.  See
3306@cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
3307(HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
3308assembler directives.
3309
3310@ifset SOM
3311Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
3312text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output.  Program text
3313is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
3314BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
3315@end ifset
3316@end ifset
3317
3318Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
3319data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
3320
3321@ifset HPPA
3322When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
3323section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
3324@code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
3325@end ifset
3326
3327To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
3328relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
3329object file details of the relocation needed.  To perform relocation
3330@code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
3331file is mentioned:
3332@itemize @bullet
3333@item
3334Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
3335an address?
3336@item
3337How long (in bytes) is this reference?
3338@item
3339Which section does the address refer to?  What is the numeric value of
3340@display
3341(@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
3342@end display
3343@item
3344Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
3345@end itemize
3346
3347@cindex addresses, format of
3348@cindex section-relative addressing
3349In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
3350@display
3351(@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
3352@end display
3353@noindent
3354Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
3355nature.
3356@ifset SOM
3357(For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
3358symbol-relative instead.)
3359@end ifset
3360
3361In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
3362@var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
3363
3364Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
3365@dfn{absolute} section.  When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
3366addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged.  For example, address
3367@code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
3368@code{@value{LD}}.  Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
3369data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
3370their absolute sections must overlap.  Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
3371part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
3372address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
3373
3374The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section.  Any
3375address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
3376rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
3377Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
3378address is to mention an undefined symbol.  A reference to a named
3379common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
3380time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
3381
3382By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
3383the linked program.  @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
3384sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program.  It is
3385customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
3386the addresses of all partial programs' text sections.  Likewise for
3387data and bss sections.
3388
3389Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
3390use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
3391
3392@node Ld Sections
3393@section Linker Sections
3394@code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
3395
3396@table @strong
3397
3398@ifset COFF-ELF
3399@cindex named sections
3400@cindex sections, named
3401@item named sections
3402@end ifset
3403@ifset aout-bout
3404@cindex text section
3405@cindex data section
3406@itemx text section
3407@itemx data section
3408@end ifset
3409These sections hold your program.  @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
3410separate but equal sections.  Anything you can say of one section is
3411true of another.
3412@c @ifset aout-bout
3413When the program is running, however, it is
3414customary for the text section to be unalterable.  The
3415text section is often shared among processes: it contains
3416instructions, constants and the like.  The data section of a running
3417program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
3418in the data section.
3419@c @end ifset
3420
3421@cindex bss section
3422@item bss section
3423This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running.  It
3424is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage.  The length of
3425each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
3426out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
3427bytes in the object file.  The bss section was invented to eliminate
3428those explicit zeros from object files.
3429
3430@cindex absolute section
3431@item absolute section
3432Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
3433This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
3434not change when relocating.  In this sense we speak of absolute
3435addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
3436
3437@cindex undefined section
3438@item undefined section
3439This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
3440the preceding sections.
3441@c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
3442@end table
3443
3444@cindex relocation example
3445An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
3446@ifset COFF-ELF
3447The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
3448@end ifset
3449Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
3450
3451@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3452@ifnottex
3453@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3454@smallexample
3455                      +-----+----+--+
3456partial program # 1:  |ttttt|dddd|00|
3457                      +-----+----+--+
3458
3459                      text   data bss
3460                      seg.   seg. seg.
3461
3462                      +---+---+---+
3463partial program # 2:  |TTT|DDD|000|
3464                      +---+---+---+
3465
3466                      +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3467linked program:       |  |TTT|ttttt|  |dddd|DDD|00000|
3468                      +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3469
3470    addresses:        0 @dots{}
3471@end smallexample
3472@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3473@end ifnottex
3474@need 5000
3475@tex
3476\bigskip
3477\line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
3478\line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3479\line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
3480
3481\line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
3482\line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3483\line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
3484
3485\line{\it linked program: \hfil}
3486\line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3487\line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
3488ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
3489DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
3490
3491\line{\it addresses: \hfil}
3492\line{0\dots\hfil}
3493
3494@end tex
3495@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3496
3497@node As Sections
3498@section Assembler Internal Sections
3499
3500@cindex internal assembler sections
3501@cindex sections in messages, internal
3502These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}.  They
3503have no meaning at run-time.  You do not really need to know about these
3504sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
3505warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
3506meanings to @command{@value{AS}}.  These sections are used to permit the
3507value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
3508section-relative address.
3509
3510@table @b
3511@cindex assembler internal logic error
3512@item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
3513An internal assembler logic error has been found.  This means there is a
3514bug in the assembler.
3515
3516@cindex expr (internal section)
3517@item expr section
3518The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
3519symbols.  When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
3520it in the expr section.
3521@c FIXME item debug
3522@c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
3523@c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
3524@c FIXME item register
3525@end table
3526
3527@node Sub-Sections
3528@section Sub-Sections
3529
3530@cindex numbered subsections
3531@cindex grouping data
3532@ifset aout-bout
3533Assembled bytes
3534@ifset COFF-ELF
3535conventionally
3536@end ifset
3537fall into two sections: text and data.
3538@end ifset
3539You may have separate groups of
3540@ifset GENERIC
3541data in named sections
3542@end ifset
3543@ifclear GENERIC
3544@ifclear aout-bout
3545data in named sections
3546@end ifclear
3547@ifset aout-bout
3548text or data
3549@end ifset
3550@end ifclear
3551that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
3552are not contiguous in the assembler source.  @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
3553use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose.  Within each section, there can be
3554numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192.  Objects assembled into the
3555same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
3556subsection.  For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
3557section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
3558assembled.  In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
3559section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
3560constants being output.
3561
3562Subsections are optional.  If you do not use subsections, everything
3563goes in subsection number zero.
3564
3565@ifset GENERIC
3566Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
3567(Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
3568of @command{@value{AS}}.)
3569@end ifset
3570@ifclear GENERIC
3571@ifset H8
3572On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
3573boundary (two bytes).
3574The same is true on the Renesas SH.
3575@end ifset
3576@ifset I960
3577@c FIXME section padding (alignment)?
3578@c Rich Pixley says padding here depends on target obj code format; that
3579@c doesn't seem particularly useful to say without further elaboration,
3580@c so for now I say nothing about it.  If this is a generic BFD issue,
3581@c these paragraphs might need to vanish from this manual, and be
3582@c discussed in BFD chapter of binutils (or some such).
3583@end ifset
3584@end ifclear
3585
3586Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
3587to highest.  (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
3588The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
3589other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
3590They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
3591data subsections as a data section.
3592
3593To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
3594into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
3595@var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
3596@ifset COFF
3597@ifset GENERIC
3598When generating COFF output, you
3599@end ifset
3600@ifclear GENERIC
3601You
3602@end ifclear
3603can also use an extra subsection
3604argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
3605@var{expression}}.
3606@end ifset
3607@ifset ELF
3608@ifset GENERIC
3609When generating ELF output, you
3610@end ifset
3611@ifclear GENERIC
3612You
3613@end ifclear
3614can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
3615to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
3616@end ifset
3617@var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
3618(@pxref{Expressions}).  If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
3619is assumed.  Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}.  Assembly
3620begins in @code{text 0}.  For instance:
3621@smallexample
3622.text 0     # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
3623.ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
3624.text 1
3625.ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
3626.data 0
3627.ascii "This lives in the data section,"
3628.ascii "in the first data subsection."
3629.text 0
3630.ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
3631.ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
3632@end smallexample
3633
3634Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
3635assembled into that section.  Because subsections are merely a convenience
3636restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
3637counter.  There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
3638@code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
3639current value.  The location counter of the section where statements are being
3640assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
3641
3642@node bss
3643@section bss Section
3644
3645@cindex bss section
3646@cindex common variable storage
3647The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
3648You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
3649not dictate data to load into it before your program executes.  When
3650your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
3651section are zeroed bytes.
3652
3653The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
3654@ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
3655
3656The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
3657another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
3658
3659@ifset GENERIC
3660When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
3661COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
3662see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}.  You may only assemble zero values into the
3663section.  Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
3664@code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
3665@end ifset
3666
3667@node Symbols
3668@chapter Symbols
3669
3670@cindex symbols
3671Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
3672things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
3673to debug.
3674
3675@quotation
3676@cindex debuggers, and symbol order
3677@emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
3678the same order they were declared.  This may break some debuggers.
3679@end quotation
3680
3681@menu
3682* Labels::                      Labels
3683* Setting Symbols::             Giving Symbols Other Values
3684* Symbol Names::                Symbol Names
3685* Dot::                         The Special Dot Symbol
3686* Symbol Attributes::           Symbol Attributes
3687@end menu
3688
3689@node Labels
3690@section Labels
3691
3692@cindex labels
3693A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
3694@samp{:}.  The symbol then represents the current value of the
3695active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
3696operand.  You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
3697different locations: the first definition overrides any other
3698definitions.
3699
3700@ifset HPPA
3701On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
3702colon, but instead must start in column zero.  Only one label may be defined on
3703a single line.  To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
3704provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
3705@end ifset
3706
3707@node Setting Symbols
3708@section Giving Symbols Other Values
3709
3710@cindex assigning values to symbols
3711@cindex symbol values, assigning
3712A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
3713by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
3714(@pxref{Expressions}).  This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
3715directive.  @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}.  In the same way, using a double
3716equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
3717@code{.eqv} directive.  @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
3718
3719@ifset Blackfin
3720Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
3721@end ifset
3722
3723@node Symbol Names
3724@section Symbol Names
3725
3726@cindex symbol names
3727@cindex names, symbol
3728@ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
3729Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}.  On most
3730machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
3731noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.  That character may be followed by any
3732string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
3733particular target machine), and underscores.
3734@end ifclear
3735@ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
3736@ifset H8
3737Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}.  On the
3738Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names.  That
3739character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
3740on the H8/300), and underscores.
3741@end ifset
3742@end ifset
3743
3744Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
3745than @code{Foo}.
3746
3747Symbol names do not start with a digit.  An exception to this rule is made for
3748Local Labels.  See below.
3749
3750Multibyte characters are supported.  To generate a symbol name containing
3751multibyte characters enclose it within double quotes and use escape codes. cf
3752@xref{Strings}.  Generating a multibyte symbol name from a label is not
3753currently supported.
3754
3755Each symbol has exactly one name.  Each name in an assembly language program
3756refers to exactly one symbol.  You may use that symbol name any number of times
3757in a program.
3758
3759@subheading Local Symbol Names
3760
3761@cindex local symbol names
3762@cindex symbol names, local
3763A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
3764By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
3765@samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
3766set of local label prefixes.
3767@ifset HPPA
3768On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
3769@end ifset
3770
3771Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
3772normally not saved in object files.  Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
3773You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols})
3774to retain the local symbols in the object files.
3775
3776@subheading Local Labels
3777
3778@cindex local labels
3779@cindex temporary symbol names
3780@cindex symbol names, temporary
3781Local labels are different from local symbols.  Local labels help compilers and
3782programmers use names temporarily.  They create symbols which are guaranteed to
3783be unique over the entire scope of the input source code and which can be
3784referred to by a simple notation.  To define a local label, write a label of
3785the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N} represents any non-negative integer).
3786To refer to the most recent previous definition of that label write
3787@samp{@b{N}b}, using the same number as when you defined the label.  To refer
3788to the next definition of a local label, write @samp{@b{N}f}.  The @samp{b}
3789stands for ``backwards'' and the @samp{f} stands for ``forwards''.
3790
3791There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
3792too.  So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
3793the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
3794defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
3795definition of a specific local label for a forward reference.  It is also worth
3796noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
3797implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
3798
3799Here is an example:
3800
3801@smallexample
38021:        branch 1f
38032:        branch 1b
38041:        branch 2f
38052:        branch 1b
3806@end smallexample
3807
3808Which is the equivalent of:
3809
3810@smallexample
3811label_1:  branch label_3
3812label_2:  branch label_1
3813label_3:  branch label_4
3814label_4:  branch label_3
3815@end smallexample
3816
3817Local label names are only a notational device.  They are immediately
3818transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
3819The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
3820are optionally emitted to the object file.  The names are constructed using
3821these parts:
3822
3823@table @code
3824@item @emph{local label prefix}
3825All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
3826Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
3827that start with the local label prefix.  These labels are
3828used for symbols you are never intended to see.  If you use the
3829@samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
3830object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
3831you may use them in debugging.
3832
3833@item @var{number}
3834This is the number that was used in the local label definition.  So if the
3835label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
3836
3837@item @kbd{C-B}
3838This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
3839of the same name.  The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
3840
3841@item @emph{ordinal number}
3842This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct.  The first definition of
3843@samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}.  The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
3844number @samp{15}, and so on.  Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
3845the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
3846@end table
3847
3848So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
3849the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
3850
3851@subheading Dollar Local Labels
3852@cindex dollar local symbols
3853
3854On some targets @code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of
3855local labels called dollar labels.  These labels go out of scope (i.e., they
3856become undefined) as soon as a non-local label is defined.  Thus they remain
3857valid for only a small region of the input source code.  Normal local labels,
3858by contrast, remain in scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined
3859by another occurrence of the same local label.
3860
3861Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
3862except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
3863@samp{@b{55$:}}.
3864
3865They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
3866names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
3867to distinguish them from ordinary labels.  For example, the fifth definition of
3868@samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
3869
3870@node Dot
3871@section The Special Dot Symbol
3872
3873@cindex dot (symbol)
3874@cindex @code{.} (symbol)
3875@cindex current address
3876@cindex location counter
3877The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
3878@command{@value{AS}} is assembling into.  Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
3879.long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
3880Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
3881directive.
3882@ifclear no-space-dir
3883Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
3884@samp{.space 4}.
3885@end ifclear
3886
3887@node Symbol Attributes
3888@section Symbol Attributes
3889
3890@cindex symbol attributes
3891@cindex attributes, symbol
3892Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
3893``Type''.  Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
3894attributes.
3895@ifset INTERNALS
3896The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
3897@end ifset
3898
3899If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
3900all these attributes, and probably won't warn you.  This makes the
3901symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
3902would want.
3903
3904@menu
3905* Symbol Value::                Value
3906* Symbol Type::                 Type
3907@ifset aout-bout
3908@ifset GENERIC
3909* a.out Symbols::               Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3910@end ifset
3911@ifclear GENERIC
3912@ifclear BOUT
3913* a.out Symbols::               Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3914@end ifclear
3915@ifset BOUT
3916* a.out Symbols::               Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3917@end ifset
3918@end ifclear
3919@end ifset
3920@ifset COFF
3921* COFF Symbols::                Symbol Attributes for COFF
3922@end ifset
3923@ifset SOM
3924* SOM Symbols::                Symbol Attributes for SOM
3925@end ifset
3926@end menu
3927
3928@node Symbol Value
3929@subsection Value
3930
3931@cindex value of a symbol
3932@cindex symbol value
3933The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits.  For a symbol which labels a
3934location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
3935number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
3936Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
3937as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking.  Absolute
3938symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
3939called absolute.
3940
3941The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way.  If it is
39420 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and
3943@code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
3944same program.  You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
3945name without defining it.  A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
3946common declaration.  The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
3947bytes (addresses).  The symbol refers to the first address of the
3948allocated storage.
3949
3950@node Symbol Type
3951@subsection Type
3952
3953@cindex type of a symbol
3954@cindex symbol type
3955The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
3956information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
3957(optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers.  The exact
3958format depends on the object-code output format in use.
3959
3960@ifset aout-bout
3961@ifclear GENERIC
3962@ifset BOUT
3963@c The following avoids a "widow" subsection title.  @group would be
3964@c better if it were available outside examples.
3965@need 1000
3966@node a.out Symbols
3967@subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3968
3969@cindex @code{b.out} symbol attributes
3970@cindex symbol attributes, @code{b.out}
3971These symbol attributes appear only when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for
3972one of the Berkeley-descended object output formats---@code{a.out} or
3973@code{b.out}.
3974
3975@end ifset
3976@ifclear BOUT
3977@node a.out Symbols
3978@subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3979
3980@cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3981@cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3982
3983@end ifclear
3984@end ifclear
3985@ifset GENERIC
3986@node a.out Symbols
3987@subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3988
3989@cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3990@cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3991
3992@end ifset
3993@menu
3994* Symbol Desc::                 Descriptor
3995* Symbol Other::                Other
3996@end menu
3997
3998@node Symbol Desc
3999@subsubsection Descriptor
4000
4001@cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
4002This is an arbitrary 16-bit value.  You may establish a symbol's
4003descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
4004(@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}).  A descriptor value means nothing to
4005@command{@value{AS}}.
4006
4007@node Symbol Other
4008@subsubsection Other
4009
4010@cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
4011This is an arbitrary 8-bit value.  It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
4012@end ifset
4013
4014@ifset COFF
4015@node COFF Symbols
4016@subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
4017
4018@cindex COFF symbol attributes
4019@cindex symbol attributes, COFF
4020
4021The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
4022like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
4023@code{.endef} directives.
4024
4025@subsubsection Primary Attributes
4026
4027@cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
4028The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
4029respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
4030
4031@subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
4032
4033@cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
4034The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
4035@code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
4036table information for COFF.
4037@end ifset
4038
4039@ifset SOM
4040@node SOM Symbols
4041@subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
4042
4043@cindex SOM symbol attributes
4044@cindex symbol attributes, SOM
4045
4046The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
4047the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
4048
4049The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
4050Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
4051@code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
4052@end ifset
4053
4054@node Expressions
4055@chapter Expressions
4056
4057@cindex expressions
4058@cindex addresses
4059@cindex numeric values
4060An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
4061Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
4062
4063The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
4064a particular section.  If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
4065enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
4066section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
4067the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
4068@command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
4069
4070@menu
4071* Empty Exprs::                 Empty Expressions
4072* Integer Exprs::               Integer Expressions
4073@end menu
4074
4075@node Empty Exprs
4076@section Empty Expressions
4077
4078@cindex empty expressions
4079@cindex expressions, empty
4080An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
4081Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
4082expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0.  This
4083is compatible with other assemblers.
4084
4085@node Integer Exprs
4086@section Integer Expressions
4087
4088@cindex integer expressions
4089@cindex expressions, integer
4090An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
4091by @emph{operators}.
4092
4093@menu
4094* Arguments::                   Arguments
4095* Operators::                   Operators
4096* Prefix Ops::                  Prefix Operators
4097* Infix Ops::                   Infix Operators
4098@end menu
4099
4100@node Arguments
4101@subsection Arguments
4102
4103@cindex expression arguments
4104@cindex arguments in expressions
4105@cindex operands in expressions
4106@cindex arithmetic operands
4107@dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions.  In other
4108contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''.  In
4109this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
4110the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
4111expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
4112instruction operands.
4113
4114Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
4115@var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
4116or undefined.  @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
4117integer.
4118
4119Numbers are usually integers.
4120
4121A number can be a flonum or bignum.  In this case, you are warned
4122that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
4123these 32 bits are an integer.  You may write integer-manipulating
4124instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
4125assemblers.
4126
4127@cindex subexpressions
4128Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
4129expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
4130operator followed by an argument.
4131
4132@node Operators
4133@subsection Operators
4134
4135@cindex operators, in expressions
4136@cindex arithmetic functions
4137@cindex functions, in expressions
4138@dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}.  Prefix
4139operators are followed by an argument.  Infix operators appear
4140between their arguments.  Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
4141whitespace.
4142
4143@node Prefix Ops
4144@subsection Prefix Operator
4145
4146@cindex prefix operators
4147@command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}.  They each take
4148one argument, which must be absolute.
4149
4150@c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
4151@c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
4152@c section (which is inside an enumerate).
4153@tex
4154\global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
4155@end tex
4156
4157@table @code
4158@item -
4159@dfn{Negation}.  Two's complement negation.
4160@item ~
4161@dfn{Complementation}.  Bitwise not.
4162@end table
4163
4164@tex
4165\global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
4166@end tex
4167
4168@node Infix Ops
4169@subsection Infix Operators
4170
4171@cindex infix operators
4172@cindex operators, permitted arguments
4173@dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side.  Operators
4174have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
4175to right.  Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
4176absolute, and the result is absolute.
4177
4178@enumerate
4179@cindex operator precedence
4180@cindex precedence of operators
4181
4182@item
4183Highest Precedence
4184
4185@table @code
4186@item *
4187@dfn{Multiplication}.
4188
4189@item /
4190@dfn{Division}.  Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
4191
4192@item %
4193@dfn{Remainder}.
4194
4195@item <<
4196@dfn{Shift Left}.  Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
4197
4198@item >>
4199@dfn{Shift Right}.  Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
4200@end table
4201
4202@item
4203Intermediate precedence
4204
4205@table @code
4206@item |
4207
4208@dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
4209
4210@item &
4211@dfn{Bitwise And}.
4212
4213@item ^
4214@dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
4215
4216@item !
4217@dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
4218@end table
4219
4220@item
4221Low Precedence
4222
4223@table @code
4224@cindex addition, permitted arguments
4225@cindex plus, permitted arguments
4226@cindex arguments for addition
4227@item +
4228@dfn{Addition}.  If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
4229the other argument.  You may not add together arguments from different
4230sections.
4231
4232@cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
4233@cindex minus, permitted arguments
4234@cindex arguments for subtraction
4235@item -
4236@dfn{Subtraction}.  If the right argument is absolute, the
4237result has the section of the left argument.
4238If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
4239You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
4240@c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
4241
4242@cindex comparison expressions
4243@cindex expressions, comparison
4244@item  ==
4245@dfn{Is Equal To}
4246@item <>
4247@itemx !=
4248@dfn{Is Not Equal To}
4249@item <
4250@dfn{Is Less Than}
4251@item >
4252@dfn{Is Greater Than}
4253@item >=
4254@dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
4255@item <=
4256@dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
4257
4258The comparison operators can be used as infix operators.  A true results has a
4259value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0.   Note, these operators
4260perform signed comparisons.
4261@end table
4262
4263@item Lowest Precedence
4264
4265@table @code
4266@item &&
4267@dfn{Logical And}.
4268
4269@item ||
4270@dfn{Logical Or}.
4271
4272These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
4273expressions.  Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
4274value of 1 but a false results does still return 0.  Also note that the logical
4275or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
4276
4277@end table
4278@end enumerate
4279
4280In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
4281address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
4282
4283@node Pseudo Ops
4284@chapter Assembler Directives
4285
4286@cindex directives, machine independent
4287@cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
4288@cindex machine independent directives
4289All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
4290The names are case insensitive for most targets, and usually written
4291in lower case.
4292
4293This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
4294target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
4295@ifset GENERIC
4296Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
4297@xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4298@end ifset
4299@ifclear GENERIC
4300@ifset machine-directives
4301@xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
4302@end ifset
4303@end ifclear
4304
4305@menu
4306* Abort::                       @code{.abort}
4307@ifset COFF
4308* ABORT (COFF)::                @code{.ABORT}
4309@end ifset
4310
4311* Align::                       @code{.align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4312* Altmacro::                    @code{.altmacro}
4313* Ascii::                       @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4314* Asciz::                       @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4315* Balign::                      @code{.balign @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4316* Bundle directives::           @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}, etc
4317* Byte::                        @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4318* CFI directives::		@code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
4319* Comm::                        @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4320* Data::                        @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4321@ifset COFF
4322* Def::                         @code{.def @var{name}}
4323@end ifset
4324@ifset aout-bout
4325* Desc::                        @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4326@end ifset
4327@ifset COFF
4328* Dim::                         @code{.dim}
4329@end ifset
4330
4331* Double::                      @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4332* Eject::                       @code{.eject}
4333* Else::                        @code{.else}
4334* Elseif::                      @code{.elseif}
4335* End::				@code{.end}
4336@ifset COFF
4337* Endef::                       @code{.endef}
4338@end ifset
4339
4340* Endfunc::                     @code{.endfunc}
4341* Endif::                       @code{.endif}
4342* Equ::                         @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4343* Equiv::                       @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4344* Eqv::                         @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4345* Err::				@code{.err}
4346* Error::			@code{.error @var{string}}
4347* Exitm::			@code{.exitm}
4348* Extern::                      @code{.extern}
4349* Fail::			@code{.fail}
4350* File::                        @code{.file}
4351* Fill::                        @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4352* Float::                       @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4353* Func::                        @code{.func}
4354* Global::                      @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4355@ifset ELF
4356* Gnu_attribute::               @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4357* Hidden::                      @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4358@end ifset
4359
4360* hword::                       @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4361* Ident::                       @code{.ident}
4362* If::                          @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4363* Incbin::                      @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
4364* Include::                     @code{.include "@var{file}"}
4365* Int::                         @code{.int @var{expressions}}
4366@ifset ELF
4367* Internal::                    @code{.internal @var{names}}
4368@end ifset
4369
4370* Irp::				@code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4371* Irpc::			@code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4372* Lcomm::                       @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
4373* Lflags::                      @code{.lflags}
4374@ifclear no-line-dir
4375* Line::                        @code{.line @var{line-number}}
4376@end ifclear
4377
4378* Linkonce::			@code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
4379* List::                        @code{.list}
4380* Ln::                          @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
4381* Loc::                         @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
4382* Loc_mark_labels::             @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
4383@ifset ELF
4384* Local::                       @code{.local @var{names}}
4385@end ifset
4386
4387* Long::                        @code{.long @var{expressions}}
4388@ignore
4389* Lsym::                        @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4390@end ignore
4391
4392* Macro::			@code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
4393* MRI::				@code{.mri @var{val}}
4394* Noaltmacro::                  @code{.noaltmacro}
4395* Nolist::                      @code{.nolist}
4396* Octa::                        @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
4397* Offset::			@code{.offset @var{loc}}
4398* Org::                         @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
4399* P2align::                     @code{.p2align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4400@ifset ELF
4401* PopSection::                  @code{.popsection}
4402* Previous::                    @code{.previous}
4403@end ifset
4404
4405* Print::			@code{.print @var{string}}
4406@ifset ELF
4407* Protected::                   @code{.protected @var{names}}
4408@end ifset
4409
4410* Psize::                       @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
4411* Purgem::			@code{.purgem @var{name}}
4412@ifset ELF
4413* PushSection::                 @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
4414@end ifset
4415
4416* Quad::                        @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
4417* Reloc::			@code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
4418* Rept::			@code{.rept @var{count}}
4419* Sbttl::                       @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
4420@ifset COFF
4421* Scl::                         @code{.scl @var{class}}
4422@end ifset
4423@ifset COFF-ELF
4424* Section::                     @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
4425@end ifset
4426
4427* Set::                         @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4428* Short::                       @code{.short @var{expressions}}
4429* Single::                      @code{.single @var{flonums}}
4430@ifset COFF-ELF
4431* Size::                        @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
4432@end ifset
4433@ifclear no-space-dir
4434* Skip::                        @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4435@end ifclear
4436
4437* Sleb128::			@code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
4438@ifclear no-space-dir
4439* Space::                       @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4440@end ifclear
4441@ifset have-stabs
4442* Stab::                        @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
4443@end ifset
4444
4445* String::                      @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
4446* Struct::			@code{.struct @var{expression}}
4447@ifset ELF
4448* SubSection::                  @code{.subsection}
4449* Symver::                      @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}}
4450@end ifset
4451
4452@ifset COFF
4453* Tag::                         @code{.tag @var{structname}}
4454@end ifset
4455
4456* Text::                        @code{.text @var{subsection}}
4457* Title::                       @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
4458@ifset COFF-ELF
4459* Type::                        @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
4460@end ifset
4461
4462* Uleb128::                     @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
4463@ifset COFF
4464* Val::                         @code{.val @var{addr}}
4465@end ifset
4466
4467@ifset ELF
4468* Version::                     @code{.version "@var{string}"}
4469* VTableEntry::                 @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
4470* VTableInherit::               @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
4471@end ifset
4472
4473* Warning::			@code{.warning @var{string}}
4474* Weak::                        @code{.weak @var{names}}
4475* Weakref::                     @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
4476* Word::                        @code{.word @var{expressions}}
4477@ifclear no-space-dir
4478* Zero::                        @code{.zero @var{size}}
4479@end ifclear
4480* Deprecated::                  Deprecated Directives
4481@end menu
4482
4483@node Abort
4484@section @code{.abort}
4485
4486@cindex @code{abort} directive
4487@cindex stopping the assembly
4488This directive stops the assembly immediately.  It is for
4489compatibility with other assemblers.  The original idea was that the
4490assembly language source would be piped into the assembler.  If the sender
4491of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
4492quit also.  One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
4493
4494@ifset COFF
4495@node ABORT (COFF)
4496@section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
4497
4498@cindex @code{ABORT} directive
4499When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
4500synonym for @samp{.abort}.
4501
4502@ifset BOUT
4503When producing @code{b.out} output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive,
4504but ignores it.
4505@end ifset
4506@end ifset
4507
4508@node Align
4509@section @code{.align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4510
4511@cindex padding the location counter
4512@cindex @code{align} directive
4513Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
4514boundary.  The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
4515required, as described below.
4516
4517The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4518padding bytes.  It (and the comma) may be omitted.  If it is omitted, the
4519padding bytes are normally zero.  However, on some systems, if the section is
4520marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4521with no-op instructions.
4522
4523The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional.  If it is present,
4524it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4525directive.  If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4526specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all.  You can omit the
4527fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4528required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4529with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4530
4531The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
4532For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, i860, iq2000, m68k, or1k,
4533s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the
4534alignment request in bytes.  For example @samp{.align 8} advances
4535the location counter until it is a multiple of 8.  If the location counter
4536is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.  For the tic54x, the
4537first expression is the alignment request in words.
4538
4539For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
4540strongarm, it is the
4541number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
4542advancement.  For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
4543counter until it a multiple of 8.  If the location counter is already a
4544multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4545
4546This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
4547native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
4548GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
4549described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
4550architectures (but are specific to GAS).
4551
4552@node Altmacro
4553@section @code{.altmacro}
4554Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
4555
4556@ftable @code
4557@item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
4558One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available.  It is used to
4559generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
4560replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion.  The
4561replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
4562separate macro expansion.  @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
4563define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
4564
4565@item String delimiters
4566You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
4567@code{"@var{string}"}:
4568
4569@table @code
4570@item '@var{string}'
4571You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
4572
4573@item <@var{string}>
4574You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
4575@end table
4576
4577@item single-character string escape
4578To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
4579character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
4580character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark).  For example, you can
4581write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
4582
4583@item Expression results as strings
4584You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
4585and use the result as a string.
4586@end ftable
4587
4588@node Ascii
4589@section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4590
4591@cindex @code{ascii} directive
4592@cindex string literals
4593@code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
4594separated by commas.  It assembles each string (with no automatic
4595trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
4596
4597@node Asciz
4598@section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4599
4600@cindex @code{asciz} directive
4601@cindex zero-terminated strings
4602@cindex null-terminated strings
4603@code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
4604a zero byte.  The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''.
4605
4606@node Balign
4607@section @code{.balign[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4608
4609@cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
4610@cindex @code{balign} directive
4611Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
4612storage boundary.  The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
4613alignment request in bytes.  For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
4614the location counter until it is a multiple of 8.  If the location counter
4615is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4616
4617The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4618padding bytes.  It (and the comma) may be omitted.  If it is omitted, the
4619padding bytes are normally zero.  However, on some systems, if the section is
4620marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4621with no-op instructions.
4622
4623The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional.  If it is present,
4624it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4625directive.  If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4626specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all.  You can omit the
4627fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4628required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4629with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4630
4631@cindex @code{balignw} directive
4632@cindex @code{balignl} directive
4633The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
4634@code{.balign} directive.  The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
4635pattern as a two byte word value.  The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
4636fill pattern as a four byte longword value.  For example, @code{.balignw
46374,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4.  If it skips two bytes, they will be
4638filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
4639the endianness of the processor).  If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
4640undefined.
4641
4642@node Bundle directives
4643@section Bundle directives
4644@subsection @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}
4645@cindex @code{bundle_align_mode} directive
4646@cindex bundle
4647@cindex instruction bundle
4648@cindex aligned instruction bundle
4649@code{.bundle_align_mode} enables or disables @dfn{aligned instruction
4650bundle} mode.  In this mode, sequences of adjacent instructions are grouped
4651into fixed-sized @dfn{bundles}.  If the argument is zero, this mode is
4652disabled (which is the default state).  If the argument it not zero, it
4653gives the size of an instruction bundle as a power of two (as for the
4654@code{.p2align} directive, @pxref{P2align}).
4655
4656For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that no instruction may span a
4657certain aligned boundary.  A @dfn{bundle} is simply a sequence of
4658instructions that starts on an aligned boundary.  For example, if
4659@var{abs-expr} is @code{5} then the bundle size is 32, so each aligned
4660chunk of 32 bytes is a bundle.  When aligned instruction bundle mode is in
4661effect, no single instruction may span a boundary between bundles.  If an
4662instruction would start too close to the end of a bundle for the length of
4663that particular instruction to fit within the bundle, then the space at the
4664end of that bundle is filled with no-op instructions so the instruction
4665starts in the next bundle.  As a corollary, it's an error if any single
4666instruction's encoding is longer than the bundle size.
4667
4668@subsection @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4669@cindex @code{bundle_lock} directive
4670@cindex @code{bundle_unlock} directive
4671The @code{.bundle_lock} and directive @code{.bundle_unlock} directives
4672allow explicit control over instruction bundle padding.  These directives
4673are only valid when @code{.bundle_align_mode} has been used to enable
4674aligned instruction bundle mode.  It's an error if they appear when
4675@code{.bundle_align_mode} has not been used at all, or when the last
4676directive was @w{@code{.bundle_align_mode 0}}.
4677
4678@cindex bundle-locked
4679For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that certain instructions may
4680appear only as part of specified permissible sequences of multiple
4681instructions, all within the same bundle.  A pair of @code{.bundle_lock}
4682and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives define a @dfn{bundle-locked}
4683instruction sequence.  For purposes of aligned instruction bundle mode, a
4684sequence starting with @code{.bundle_lock} and ending with
4685@code{.bundle_unlock} is treated as a single instruction.  That is, the
4686entire sequence must fit into a single bundle and may not span a bundle
4687boundary.  If necessary, no-op instructions will be inserted before the
4688first instruction of the sequence so that the whole sequence starts on an
4689aligned bundle boundary.  It's an error if the sequence is longer than the
4690bundle size.
4691
4692For convenience when using @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4693inside assembler macros (@pxref{Macro}), bundle-locked sequences may be
4694nested.  That is, a second @code{.bundle_lock} directive before the next
4695@code{.bundle_unlock} directive has no effect except that it must be
4696matched by another closing @code{.bundle_unlock} so that there is the
4697same number of @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives.
4698
4699@node Byte
4700@section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4701
4702@cindex @code{byte} directive
4703@cindex integers, one byte
4704@code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
4705Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
4706
4707@node CFI directives
4708@section CFI directives
4709@subsection @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
4710@cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
4711@code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
4712should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
4713If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
4714if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
4715To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}.  The default if this
4716directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
4717
4718On targets that support compact unwinding tables these can be generated
4719by specifying @code{.eh_frame_entry} instead of @code{.eh_frame}.
4720
4721Some targets may support an additional name, such as @code{.c6xabi.exidx}
4722which is used by the @value{TIC6X} target.
4723
4724The @code{.cfi_sections} directive can be repeated, with the same or different
4725arguments, provided that CFI generation has not yet started.  Once CFI
4726generation has started however the section list is fixed and any attempts to
4727redefine it will result in an error.
4728
4729@subsection @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
4730@cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
4731@code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
4732should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
4733data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
4734@code{.cfi_endproc}.
4735
4736Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
4737it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
4738
4739@subsection @code{.cfi_endproc}
4740@cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
4741@code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
4742unwind entry previously opened by
4743@code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
4744
4745@subsection @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4746@cindex @code{cfi_personality} directive
4747@code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
4748@var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
4749should be encoded.  If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4750argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
4751a constant or a symbol name.  When using indirect encodings,
4752the symbol provided should be the location where personality
4753can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
4754The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
4755no personality routine.
4756
4757@subsection @code{.cfi_personality_id @var{id}}
4758@cindex @code{cfi_personality_id} directive
4759@code{cfi_personality_id} defines a personality routine by its index as
4760defined in a compact unwinding format.
4761Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4762with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4763
4764@subsection @code{.cfi_fde_data [@var{opcode1} [, @dots{}]]}
4765@cindex @code{cfi_fde_data} directive
4766@code{cfi_fde_data} is used to describe the compact unwind opcodes to be
4767used for the current function.  These are emitted inline in the
4768@code{.eh_frame_entry} section if small enough and there is no LSDA, or
4769in the @code{.gnu.extab} section otherwise.
4770Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4771with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4772
4773@subsection @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4774@code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
4775@var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
4776should be encoded.  If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), the second
4777argument is not present, otherwise the second argument should be a constant
4778or a symbol name.  The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
4779meaning that no LSDA is present.
4780
4781@subsection @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} [@var{align}]
4782@code{.cfi_inline_lsda} marks the start of a LSDA data section and
4783switches to the corresponding @code{.gnu.extab} section.
4784Must be preceded by a CFI block containing a @code{.cfi_lsda} directive.
4785Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4786with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4787
4788The table header and unwinding opcodes will be generated at this point,
4789so that they are immediately followed by the LSDA data.  The symbol
4790referenced by the @code{.cfi_lsda} directive should still be defined
4791in case a fallback FDE based encoding is used.  The LSDA data is terminated
4792by a section directive.
4793
4794The optional @var{align} argument specifies the alignment required.
4795The alignment is specified as a power of two, as with the
4796@code{.p2align} directive.
4797
4798@subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4799@code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
4800address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
4801
4802@subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
4803@code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
4804now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
4805remains the same.
4806
4807@subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4808@code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
4809remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
4810absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
4811CFA address.
4812
4813@subsection @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4814Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
4815value that is added/substracted from the previous offset.
4816
4817@subsection @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4818Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4819CFA.
4820
4821@subsection @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4822Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4823the current CFA register.  This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
4824using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
4825This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
4826code it's annotating.
4827
4828@subsection @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
4829Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
4830
4831@subsection @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
4832@code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
4833same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
4834instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
4835
4836@subsection @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
4837From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
4838
4839@subsection @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
4840Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
4841i.e. no restoration needed.
4842
4843@subsection @code{.cfi_remember_state} and @code{.cfi_restore_state}
4844@code{.cfi_remember_state} pushes the set of rules for every register onto an
4845implicit stack, while @code{.cfi_restore_state} pops them off the stack and
4846places them in the current row.  This is useful for situations where you have
4847multiple @code{.cfi_*} directives that need to be undone due to the control
4848flow of the program.  For example, we could have something like this (assuming
4849the CFA is the value of @code{rbp}):
4850
4851@smallexample
4852        je label
4853        popq %rbx
4854        .cfi_restore %rbx
4855        popq %r12
4856        .cfi_restore %r12
4857        popq %rbp
4858        .cfi_restore %rbp
4859        .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8
4860        ret
4861label:
4862        /* Do something else */
4863@end smallexample
4864
4865Here, we want the @code{.cfi} directives to affect only the rows corresponding
4866to the instructions before @code{label}.  This means we'd have to add multiple
4867@code{.cfi} directives after @code{label} to recreate the original save
4868locations of the registers, as well as setting the CFA back to the value of
4869@code{rbp}.  This would be clumsy, and result in a larger binary size. Instead,
4870we can write:
4871
4872@smallexample
4873        je label
4874        popq %rbx
4875        .cfi_remember_state
4876        .cfi_restore %rbx
4877        popq %r12
4878        .cfi_restore %r12
4879        popq %rbp
4880        .cfi_restore %rbp
4881        .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8
4882        ret
4883label:
4884        .cfi_restore_state
4885        /* Do something else */
4886@end smallexample
4887
4888That way, the rules for the instructions after @code{label} will be the same
4889as before the first @code{.cfi_restore} without having to use multiple
4890@code{.cfi} directives.
4891
4892@subsection @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
4893Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
4894directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
4895
4896@subsection @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
4897Mark current function as signal trampoline.
4898
4899@subsection @code{.cfi_window_save}
4900SPARC register window has been saved.
4901
4902@subsection @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
4903Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info.  One
4904might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
4905opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
4906
4907@subsection @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
4908The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}.  The value of @var{label}
4909will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
4910description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
4911
4912The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
4913limited to the return address register.  Here, it can be useful to
4914mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
4915by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
4916or another register.
4917
4918@node Comm
4919@section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4920
4921@cindex @code{comm} directive
4922@cindex symbol, common
4923@code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}.  When linking, a
4924common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
4925of the same name in another object file.  If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
4926definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
4927allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory.  @var{length} must be an
4928absolute expression.  If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
4929the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
4930using the largest size.
4931
4932@ifset COFF-ELF
4933When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
4934an optional third argument.  This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
4935specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
4936that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
4937as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
4938boundary).  The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
4939power of two.  If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
4940common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol.  If no
4941alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
4942largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
4943maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
4944is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
4945@samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
4946multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
4947It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
4948(@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
4949@end ifset
4950
4951@ifset HPPA
4952The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA.  The syntax is
4953@samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
4954@end ifset
4955
4956@node Data
4957@section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4958
4959@cindex @code{data} directive
4960@code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
4961end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
4962absolute expression).  If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
4963to zero.
4964
4965@ifset COFF
4966@node Def
4967@section @code{.def @var{name}}
4968
4969@cindex @code{def} directive
4970@cindex COFF symbols, debugging
4971@cindex debugging COFF symbols
4972Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
4973definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
4974@ifset BOUT
4975
4976This directive is only observed when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF
4977format output; when producing @code{b.out}, @samp{.def} is recognized,
4978but ignored.
4979@end ifset
4980@end ifset
4981
4982@ifset aout-bout
4983@node Desc
4984@section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4985
4986@cindex @code{desc} directive
4987@cindex COFF symbol descriptor
4988@cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
4989This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
4990to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
4991
4992@ifset COFF
4993The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
4994configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
4995object format.  For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
4996it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
4997@end ifset
4998@end ifset
4999
5000@ifset COFF
5001@node Dim
5002@section @code{.dim}
5003
5004@cindex @code{dim} directive
5005@cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
5006@cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
5007This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
5008information in the symbol table.  It is only permitted inside
5009@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
5010@ifset BOUT
5011
5012@samp{.dim} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
5013@command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
5014ignores it.
5015@end ifset
5016@end ifset
5017
5018@node Double
5019@section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
5020
5021@cindex @code{double} directive
5022@cindex floating point numbers (double)
5023@code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas.  It
5024assembles floating point numbers.
5025@ifset GENERIC
5026The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5027@command{@value{AS}} is configured.  @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5028@end ifset
5029@ifclear GENERIC
5030@ifset IEEEFLOAT
5031On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
5032in @sc{ieee} format.
5033@end ifset
5034@end ifclear
5035
5036@node Eject
5037@section @code{.eject}
5038
5039@cindex @code{eject} directive
5040@cindex new page, in listings
5041@cindex page, in listings
5042@cindex listing control: new page
5043Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
5044
5045@node Else
5046@section @code{.else}
5047
5048@cindex @code{else} directive
5049@code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
5050assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}.  It marks the beginning of a section
5051of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
5052was false.
5053
5054@node Elseif
5055@section @code{.elseif}
5056
5057@cindex @code{elseif} directive
5058@code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
5059assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}.  It is shorthand for beginning a new
5060@code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
5061
5062@node End
5063@section @code{.end}
5064
5065@cindex @code{end} directive
5066@code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file.  @command{@value{AS}} does not
5067process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
5068
5069@ifset COFF
5070@node Endef
5071@section @code{.endef}
5072
5073@cindex @code{endef} directive
5074This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
5075@code{.def}.
5076@ifset BOUT
5077
5078@samp{.endef} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; if
5079@command{@value{AS}} is configured to generate @code{b.out}, it accepts this
5080directive but ignores it.
5081@end ifset
5082@end ifset
5083
5084@node Endfunc
5085@section @code{.endfunc}
5086@cindex @code{endfunc} directive
5087@code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
5088
5089@node Endif
5090@section @code{.endif}
5091
5092@cindex @code{endif} directive
5093@code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
5094it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
5095conditionally.  @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
5096
5097@node Equ
5098@section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5099
5100@cindex @code{equ} directive
5101@cindex assigning values to symbols
5102@cindex symbols, assigning values to
5103This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
5104It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
5105
5106@ifset HPPA
5107The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
5108@samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
5109@end ifset
5110
5111@ifset Z80
5112The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
5113@samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
5114On the Z80 it is an eror if @var{symbol} is already defined,
5115but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
5116Compare @ref{Equiv}.
5117@end ifset
5118
5119@node Equiv
5120@section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5121@cindex @code{equiv} directive
5122The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
5123the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined.  Note a
5124symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
5125undefined.
5126
5127Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
5128@smallexample
5129.ifdef SYM
5130.err
5131.endif
5132.equ SYM,VAL
5133@end smallexample
5134plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
5135
5136@node Eqv
5137@section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5138@cindex @code{eqv} directive
5139The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
5140evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately.  Instead each time
5141the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
5142value is taken.
5143
5144@node Err
5145@section @code{.err}
5146@cindex @code{err} directive
5147If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
5148message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
5149object file.  This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
5150
5151@node Error
5152@section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
5153@cindex error directive
5154
5155Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
5156string that will be emitted as the error message.  If you don't specify the
5157message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
5158@xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
5159
5160@smallexample
5161 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
5162@end smallexample
5163
5164@node Exitm
5165@section @code{.exitm}
5166Exit early from the current macro definition.  @xref{Macro}.
5167
5168@node Extern
5169@section @code{.extern}
5170
5171@cindex @code{extern} directive
5172@code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
5173with other assemblers---but it is ignored.  @command{@value{AS}} treats
5174all undefined symbols as external.
5175
5176@node Fail
5177@section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
5178
5179@cindex @code{fail} directive
5180Generates an error or a warning.  If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
5181or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message.  If the value is less
5182than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message.  The message will
5183include the value of @var{expression}.  This can occasionally be useful inside
5184complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
5185
5186@node File
5187@section @code{.file}
5188@cindex @code{file} directive
5189
5190@ifclear no-file-dir
5191There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive.  Targets
5192that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
5193@code{.file}.  Other targets use the default version.
5194
5195@subheading Default Version
5196
5197@cindex logical file name
5198@cindex file name, logical
5199This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
5200are about to start a new logical file.  The syntax is:
5201
5202@smallexample
5203.file @var{string}
5204@end smallexample
5205
5206@var{string} is the new file name.  In general, the filename is
5207recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
5208to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}.  This
5209statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
5210old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
5211
5212@subheading DWARF2 Version
5213@end ifclear
5214
5215When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
5216to the @code{.debug_line} file name table.  The syntax is:
5217
5218@smallexample
5219.file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
5220@end smallexample
5221
5222The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
5223index of the entry in the table.  The @var{filename} operand is a C string
5224literal.
5225
5226The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
5227table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
5228information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
5229entries will have.
5230
5231@node Fill
5232@section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
5233
5234@cindex @code{fill} directive
5235@cindex writing patterns in memory
5236@cindex patterns, writing in memory
5237@var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
5238This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes.  @var{Repeat}
5239may be zero or more.  @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
5240more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
5241other people's assemblers.  The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
5242is taken from an 8-byte number.  The highest order 4 bytes are
5243zero.  The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
5244byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
5245Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
5246@var{size} bytes of this number.  Again, this bizarre behavior is
5247compatible with other people's assemblers.
5248
5249@var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
5250If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
5251assumed zero.  If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
5252@var{size} is assumed to be 1.
5253
5254@node Float
5255@section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
5256
5257@cindex floating point numbers (single)
5258@cindex @code{float} directive
5259This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas.  It
5260has the same effect as @code{.single}.
5261@ifset GENERIC
5262The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5263@command{@value{AS}} is configured.
5264@xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5265@end ifset
5266@ifclear GENERIC
5267@ifset IEEEFLOAT
5268On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
5269in @sc{ieee} format.
5270@end ifset
5271@end ifclear
5272
5273@node Func
5274@section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
5275@cindex @code{func} directive
5276@code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
5277is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
5278Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
5279@var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
5280prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
5281@samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
5282All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
5283The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
5284
5285@node Global
5286@section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
5287
5288@cindex @code{global} directive
5289@cindex symbol, making visible to linker
5290@code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}.  If you define
5291@var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
5292other partial programs that are linked with it.  Otherwise,
5293@var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
5294from another file linked into the same program.
5295
5296Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
5297compatibility with other assemblers.
5298
5299@ifset HPPA
5300On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
5301partial programs.  You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
5302@xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
5303@end ifset
5304
5305@ifset ELF
5306@node Gnu_attribute
5307@section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
5308Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file.  @xref{Object Attributes}.
5309
5310@node Hidden
5311@section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
5312
5313@cindex @code{hidden} directive
5314@cindex visibility
5315This is one of the ELF visibility directives.  The other two are
5316@code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
5317@code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5318
5319This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5320their binding: local, global or weak).  The directive sets the visibility to
5321@code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
5322Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
5323@end ifset
5324
5325@node hword
5326@section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
5327
5328@cindex @code{hword} directive
5329@cindex integers, 16-bit
5330@cindex numbers, 16-bit
5331@cindex sixteen bit integers
5332This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
5333a 16 bit number for each.
5334
5335@ifset GENERIC
5336This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
5337architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
5338@end ifset
5339@ifclear GENERIC
5340@ifset W32
5341This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
5342@end ifset
5343@ifset W16
5344This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
5345@end ifset
5346@end ifclear
5347
5348@node Ident
5349@section @code{.ident}
5350
5351@cindex @code{ident} directive
5352
5353This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files.  The
5354behavior of this directive varies depending on the target.  When using the
5355a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
5356source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
5357for it.  When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
5358@code{.rdata} section, depending on the target.  When using ELF, comments are
5359emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
5360
5361@node If
5362@section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
5363
5364@cindex conditional assembly
5365@cindex @code{if} directive
5366@code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
5367considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
5368(which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero.  The end of
5369the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
5370(@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
5371alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
5372If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
5373nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
5374
5375The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
5376@table @code
5377@cindex @code{ifdef} directive
5378@item .ifdef @var{symbol}
5379Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5380has been defined.  Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
5381is considered to be undefined.
5382
5383@cindex @code{ifb} directive
5384@item .ifb @var{text}
5385Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
5386
5387@cindex @code{ifc} directive
5388@item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
5389Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same.  The
5390strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes.  If they are not quoted,
5391the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
5392end of the line.  Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted.  The
5393string comparison is case sensitive.
5394
5395@cindex @code{ifeq} directive
5396@item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
5397Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
5398
5399@cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
5400@item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
5401Another form of @code{.ifc}.  The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
5402
5403@cindex @code{ifge} directive
5404@item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
5405Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
5406equal to zero.
5407
5408@cindex @code{ifgt} directive
5409@item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
5410Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
5411
5412@cindex @code{ifle} directive
5413@item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
5414Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
5415to zero.
5416
5417@cindex @code{iflt} directive
5418@item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
5419Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
5420
5421@cindex @code{ifnb} directive
5422@item .ifnb @var{text}
5423Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5424following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
5425
5426@cindex @code{ifnc} directive
5427@item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
5428Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5429following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5430
5431@cindex @code{ifndef} directive
5432@cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
5433@item .ifndef @var{symbol}
5434@itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
5435Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5436has not been defined.  Both spelling variants are equivalent.  Note a symbol
5437which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
5438
5439@cindex @code{ifne} directive
5440@item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
5441Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
5442(in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
5443
5444@cindex @code{ifnes} directive
5445@item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
5446Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5447following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5448@end table
5449
5450@node Incbin
5451@section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
5452
5453@cindex @code{incbin} directive
5454@cindex binary files, including
5455The @code{incbin} directive can be used with @option{--allow-incbin}.
5456
5457The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
5458location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
5459option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}).  Quotation marks are required
5460around @var{file}.
5461
5462The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
5463@var{file}.  The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
5464read.  Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
5465responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
5466after the @code{incbin} directive.
5467
5468@node Include
5469@section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
5470
5471@cindex @code{include} directive
5472@cindex supporting files, including
5473@cindex files, including
5474This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
5475points in your source program.  The code from @var{file} is assembled as
5476if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
5477included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues.  You
5478can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
5479(@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}).  Quotation marks are required
5480around @var{file}.
5481
5482@node Int
5483@section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
5484
5485@cindex @code{int} directive
5486@cindex integers, 32-bit
5487Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
5488For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
5489expression.  The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
5490of target the assembly is for.
5491
5492@ifclear GENERIC
5493@ifset H8
5494On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
5495integers.  On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
549632-bit integers.
5497@end ifset
5498@end ifclear
5499
5500@ifset ELF
5501@node Internal
5502@section @code{.internal @var{names}}
5503
5504@cindex @code{internal} directive
5505@cindex visibility
5506This is one of the ELF visibility directives.  The other two are
5507@code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
5508@code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5509
5510This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5511their binding: local, global or weak).  The directive sets the visibility to
5512@code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
5513(i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
5514processing must also be performed upon the  symbols as well.
5515@end ifset
5516
5517@node Irp
5518@section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5519
5520@cindex @code{irp} directive
5521Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5522The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
5523terminated by an @code{.endr} directive.  For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
5524set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled.  If no
5525@var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
5526@var{symbol} set to the null string.  To refer to @var{symbol} within the
5527sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5528
5529For example, assembling
5530
5531@example
5532        .irp    param,1,2,3
5533        move    d\param,sp@@-
5534        .endr
5535@end example
5536
5537is equivalent to assembling
5538
5539@example
5540        move    d1,sp@@-
5541        move    d2,sp@@-
5542        move    d3,sp@@-
5543@end example
5544
5545For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
5546
5547@node Irpc
5548@section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5549
5550@cindex @code{irpc} directive
5551Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5552The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
5553terminated by an @code{.endr} directive.  For each character in @var{value},
5554@var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
5555assembled.  If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
5556assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string.  To refer to
5557@var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5558
5559For example, assembling
5560
5561@example
5562        .irpc    param,123
5563        move    d\param,sp@@-
5564        .endr
5565@end example
5566
5567is equivalent to assembling
5568
5569@example
5570        move    d1,sp@@-
5571        move    d2,sp@@-
5572        move    d3,sp@@-
5573@end example
5574
5575For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
5576at @xref{Macro}.
5577
5578@node Lcomm
5579@section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
5580
5581@cindex @code{lcomm} directive
5582@cindex local common symbols
5583@cindex symbols, local common
5584Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
5585denoted by @var{symbol}.  The section and value of @var{symbol} are
5586those of the new local common.  The addresses are allocated in the bss
5587section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed.  @var{Symbol}
5588is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
5589not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
5590
5591@ifset GENERIC
5592Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}.  This
5593argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
5594@end ifset
5595
5596@ifset HPPA
5597The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA.  The syntax is
5598@samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5599@end ifset
5600
5601@node Lflags
5602@section @code{.lflags}
5603
5604@cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
5605@command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
5606assemblers, but ignores it.
5607
5608@ifclear no-line-dir
5609@node Line
5610@section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
5611
5612@cindex @code{line} directive
5613@cindex logical line number
5614@ifset aout-bout
5615Change the logical line number.  @var{line-number} must be an absolute
5616expression.  The next line has that logical line number.  Therefore any other
5617statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
5618reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.  One day
5619@command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
5620for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
5621@end ifset
5622
5623Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
5624@code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
5625when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
5626were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
5627@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
5628
5629Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
5630used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
5631debugging.
5632@end ifclear
5633
5634@node Linkonce
5635@section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
5636@cindex COMDAT
5637@cindex @code{linkonce} directive
5638@cindex common sections
5639Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
5640This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
5641but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
5642The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
5643Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
5644unique.
5645
5646This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
5647writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
5648Executable format used on Windows NT.
5649
5650The @var{type} argument is optional.  If specified, it must be one of the
5651following strings.  For example:
5652@smallexample
5653.linkonce same_size
5654@end smallexample
5655Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
5656
5657@table @code
5658@item discard
5659Silently discard duplicate sections.  This is the default.
5660
5661@item one_only
5662Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
5663
5664@item same_size
5665Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
5666
5667@item same_contents
5668Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
5669@end table
5670
5671@node List
5672@section @code{.list}
5673
5674@cindex @code{list} directive
5675@cindex listing control, turning on
5676Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
5677not assembly listings are generated.  These two directives maintain an
5678internal counter (which is zero initially).   @code{.list} increments the
5679counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it.  Assembly listings are
5680generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5681
5682By default, listings are disabled.  When you enable them (with the
5683@samp{-a} command line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
5684the initial value of the listing counter is one.
5685
5686@node Ln
5687@section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
5688
5689@cindex @code{ln} directive
5690@ifclear no-line-dir
5691@samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
5692@end ifclear
5693@ifset no-line-dir
5694Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number.  @var{line-number}
5695must be an absolute expression.  The next line has that logical
5696line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
5697statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
5698line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
5699@ifset BOUT
5700
5701This directive is accepted, but ignored, when @command{@value{AS}} is
5702configured for @code{b.out}; its effect is only associated with COFF
5703output format.
5704@end ifset
5705@end ifset
5706
5707@node Loc
5708@section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
5709@cindex @code{loc} directive
5710When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5711the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
5712number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
5713instruction.  The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
5714arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
5715the row is added.
5716
5717The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
5718
5719@table @code
5720@item basic_block
5721This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
5722@code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5723
5724@item prologue_end
5725This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
5726@code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5727
5728@item epilogue_begin
5729This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
5730@code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5731
5732@item is_stmt @var{value}
5733This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
5734@code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
5735either 0 or 1.
5736
5737@item isa @var{value}
5738This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5739state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5740
5741@item discriminator @var{value}
5742This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5743state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5744
5745@end table
5746
5747@node Loc_mark_labels
5748@section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
5749@cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
5750When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5751the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
5752to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
5753register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
5754The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
5755this function respectively.
5756
5757@ifset ELF
5758@node Local
5759@section @code{.local @var{names}}
5760
5761@cindex @code{local} directive
5762This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
5763the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
5764will not be externally visible.  If the symbols do not already exist,
5765they will be created.
5766
5767For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
5768accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
5769the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
5770(@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
5771@end ifset
5772
5773@node Long
5774@section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
5775
5776@cindex @code{long} directive
5777@code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}.  @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
5778
5779@ignore
5780@c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
5781@c what it really ought to do
5782@node Lsym
5783@section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5784
5785@cindex @code{lsym} directive
5786@cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
5787@code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
5788the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
5789rest of the assembly.  This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
5790the same as the expression value:
5791@smallexample
5792@var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
5793@var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
5794@var{value} = @var{expression}
5795@end smallexample
5796@noindent
5797The new symbol is not flagged as external.
5798@end ignore
5799
5800@node Macro
5801@section @code{.macro}
5802
5803@cindex macros
5804The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
5805generate assembly output.  For example, this definition specifies a macro
5806@code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
5807
5808@example
5809        .macro  sum from=0, to=5
5810        .long   \from
5811        .if     \to-\from
5812        sum     "(\from+1)",\to
5813        .endif
5814        .endm
5815@end example
5816
5817@noindent
5818With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
5819
5820@example
5821        .long   0
5822        .long   1
5823        .long   2
5824        .long   3
5825        .long   4
5826        .long   5
5827@end example
5828
5829@ftable @code
5830@item .macro @var{macname}
5831@itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
5832@cindex @code{macro} directive
5833Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}.  If your macro
5834definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
5835separated by commas or spaces.  You can qualify the macro argument to
5836indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
5837@samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
5838(through @samp{:@code{vararg}}).  You can supply a default value for any
5839macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}.  You
5840cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
5841subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
5842definitions.  For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
5843
5844@table @code
5845@item .macro comm
5846Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
5847arguments.
5848
5849@item  .macro plus1 p, p1
5850@itemx .macro plus1 p p1
5851Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
5852which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
5853@samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
5854
5855@item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
5856Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
5857arguments.  The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
5858After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
5859@samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
5860@var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
5861,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
5862@samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
5863
5864@item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
5865Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
5866arguments.  The first argument must always have a value specified, but
5867not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
5868will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
5869
5870When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
5871position, or by keyword.  For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
5872@samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
5873
5874@end table
5875
5876Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
5877as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
5878occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
5879characters when they occur in a special position.  For example, if the colon
5880(@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
5881architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
5882character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
5883replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
5884construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
5885identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution.  So for example
5886this macro definition:
5887
5888@example
5889	.macro label l
5890\l:
5891	.endm
5892@end example
5893
5894might not work as expected.  Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
5895called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
5896assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
5897identifier.
5898
5899Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
5900which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names).  So
5901for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
5902length specifier like this:
5903
5904@example
5905	.macro opcode base length
5906        \base.\length
5907	.endm
5908@end example
5909
5910and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
5911instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
5912interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
5913
5914There are several possible ways around this problem:
5915
5916@table @code
5917@item Insert white space
5918If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
5919solution.  eg:
5920
5921@example
5922	.macro label l
5923\l :
5924	.endm
5925@end example
5926
5927@item Use @samp{\()}
5928The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
5929the following text.  eg:
5930
5931@example
5932	.macro opcode base length
5933        \base\().\length
5934	.endm
5935@end example
5936
5937@item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
5938In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
5939used as a separator.  eg:
5940
5941@example
5942	.altmacro
5943	.macro label l
5944l&:
5945	.endm
5946@end example
5947@end table
5948
5949Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
5950also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
5951and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
5952
5953@item .endm
5954@cindex @code{endm} directive
5955Mark the end of a macro definition.
5956
5957@item .exitm
5958@cindex @code{exitm} directive
5959Exit early from the current macro definition.
5960
5961@cindex number of macros executed
5962@cindex macros, count executed
5963@item \@@
5964@command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
5965executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
5966output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
5967
5968@item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
5969@emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
5970macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
5971@xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
5972@end ftable
5973
5974@node MRI
5975@section @code{.mri @var{val}}
5976
5977@cindex @code{mri} directive
5978@cindex MRI mode, temporarily
5979If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode.  If
5980@var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode.  This change
5981affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
5982of the file.  @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
5983
5984@node Noaltmacro
5985@section @code{.noaltmacro}
5986Disable alternate macro mode.  @xref{Altmacro}.
5987
5988@node Nolist
5989@section @code{.nolist}
5990
5991@cindex @code{nolist} directive
5992@cindex listing control, turning off
5993Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
5994not assembly listings are generated.  These two directives maintain an
5995internal counter (which is zero initially).   @code{.list} increments the
5996counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it.  Assembly listings are
5997generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5998
5999@node Octa
6000@section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
6001
6002@c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on i960, others?  Or warn?
6003@cindex @code{octa} directive
6004@cindex integer, 16-byte
6005@cindex sixteen byte integer
6006This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas.  For each
6007bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
6008
6009The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6010hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
6011
6012@node Offset
6013@section @code{.offset @var{loc}}
6014
6015@cindex @code{offset} directive
6016Set the location counter to @var{loc} in the absolute section.  @var{loc} must
6017be an absolute expression.  This directive may be useful for defining
6018symbols with absolute values.  Do not confuse it with the @code{.org}
6019directive.
6020
6021@node Org
6022@section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
6023
6024@cindex @code{org} directive
6025@cindex location counter, advancing
6026@cindex advancing location counter
6027@cindex current address, advancing
6028Advance the location counter of the current section to
6029@var{new-lc}.  @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
6030expression with the same section as the current subsection.  That is,
6031you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
6032wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored.  To be compatible
6033with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
6034@command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
6035is the same as the current subsection.
6036
6037@code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
6038unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
6039backwards.
6040
6041@c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
6042@c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
6043@c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91
6044Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
6045may not be undefined.  If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
6046a chance to share your improved assembler.
6047
6048Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
6049to the start of the subsection.  This is compatible with other
6050people's assemblers.
6051
6052When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
6053intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
6054absolute expression.  If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
6055@var{fill} defaults to zero.
6056
6057@node P2align
6058@section @code{.p2align[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
6059
6060@cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
6061@cindex @code{p2align} directive
6062Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
6063storage boundary.  The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
6064number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
6065advancement.  For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
6066counter until it a multiple of 8.  If the location counter is already a
6067multiple of 8, no change is needed.
6068
6069The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
6070padding bytes.  It (and the comma) may be omitted.  If it is omitted, the
6071padding bytes are normally zero.  However, on some systems, if the section is
6072marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
6073with no-op instructions.
6074
6075The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional.  If it is present,
6076it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
6077directive.  If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
6078specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all.  You can omit the
6079fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
6080required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
6081with no-op instructions when appropriate.
6082
6083@cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
6084@cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
6085The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
6086@code{.p2align} directive.  The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
6087pattern as a two byte word value.  The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
6088fill pattern as a four byte longword value.  For example, @code{.p2alignw
60892,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4.  If it skips two bytes, they will be
6090filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
6091the endianness of the processor).  If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
6092undefined.
6093
6094@ifset ELF
6095@node PopSection
6096@section @code{.popsection}
6097
6098@cindex @code{popsection} directive
6099@cindex Section Stack
6100This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The others are
6101@code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6102@code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
6103(@pxref{Previous}).
6104
6105This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
6106section (and subsection) on the section stack.  This section is popped off the
6107stack.
6108@end ifset
6109
6110@ifset ELF
6111@node Previous
6112@section @code{.previous}
6113
6114@cindex @code{previous} directive
6115@cindex Section Stack
6116This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The others are
6117@code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6118@code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
6119(@pxref{PopSection}).
6120
6121This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
6122referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one.  Multiple
6123@code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
6124subsections).  For example:
6125
6126@smallexample
6127.section A
6128 .subsection 1
6129  .word 0x1234
6130 .subsection 2
6131  .word 0x5678
6132.previous
6133 .word 0x9abc
6134@end smallexample
6135
6136Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
6137section A.  Whilst:
6138
6139@smallexample
6140.section A
6141.subsection 1
6142  # Now in section A subsection 1
6143  .word 0x1234
6144.section B
6145.subsection 0
6146  # Now in section B subsection 0
6147  .word 0x5678
6148.subsection 1
6149  # Now in section B subsection 1
6150  .word 0x9abc
6151.previous
6152  # Now in section B subsection 0
6153  .word 0xdef0
6154@end smallexample
6155
6156Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
6157section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
6158
6159In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
6160the top section on the section stack.
6161@end ifset
6162
6163@node Print
6164@section @code{.print @var{string}}
6165
6166@cindex @code{print} directive
6167@command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
6168assembly.  You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
6169
6170@ifset ELF
6171@node Protected
6172@section @code{.protected @var{names}}
6173
6174@cindex @code{protected} directive
6175@cindex visibility
6176This is one of the ELF visibility directives.  The other two are
6177@code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
6178
6179This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
6180their binding: local, global or weak).  The directive sets the visibility to
6181@code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
6182components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
6183component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
6184this.
6185@end ifset
6186
6187@node Psize
6188@section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
6189
6190@cindex @code{psize} directive
6191@cindex listing control: paper size
6192@cindex paper size, for listings
6193Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
6194number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
6195
6196If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
6197of 60.  You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
6198default width is 200 columns.
6199
6200@command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
6201lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
6202@code{.eject}).
6203
6204If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
6205those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
6206
6207@node Purgem
6208@section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
6209
6210@cindex @code{purgem} directive
6211Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
6212expanded.  @xref{Macro}.
6213
6214@ifset ELF
6215@node PushSection
6216@section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
6217
6218@cindex @code{pushsection} directive
6219@cindex Section Stack
6220This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The others are
6221@code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6222@code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6223(@pxref{Previous}).
6224
6225This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
6226top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
6227subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
6228@code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
6229as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
6230@end ifset
6231
6232@node Quad
6233@section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
6234
6235@cindex @code{quad} directive
6236@code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas.  For
6237each bignum, it emits
6238@ifclear bignum-16
6239an 8-byte integer.  If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
6240warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
6241@cindex eight-byte integer
6242@cindex integer, 8-byte
6243
6244The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6245hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
6246@end ifclear
6247@ifset bignum-16
6248a 16-byte integer.  If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
6249warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
6250@cindex sixteen-byte integer
6251@cindex integer, 16-byte
6252@end ifset
6253
6254@node Reloc
6255@section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
6256
6257@cindex @code{reloc} directive
6258Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
6259@var{expression}.  If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
6260the current section.  If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
6261symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
6262@var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
6263absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend.  e.g. ELF REL
6264targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
6265relocation.  This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
6266section.
6267
6268@node Rept
6269@section @code{.rept @var{count}}
6270
6271@cindex @code{rept} directive
6272Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
6273@code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
6274
6275For example, assembling
6276
6277@example
6278        .rept   3
6279        .long   0
6280        .endr
6281@end example
6282
6283is equivalent to assembling
6284
6285@example
6286        .long   0
6287        .long   0
6288        .long   0
6289@end example
6290
6291@node Sbttl
6292@section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
6293
6294@cindex @code{sbttl} directive
6295@cindex subtitles for listings
6296@cindex listing control: subtitle
6297Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
6298title line) when generating assembly listings.
6299
6300This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6301it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6302
6303@ifset COFF
6304@node Scl
6305@section @code{.scl @var{class}}
6306
6307@cindex @code{scl} directive
6308@cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
6309@cindex COFF symbol storage class
6310Set the storage-class value for a symbol.  This directive may only be
6311used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.  Storage class may flag
6312whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
6313symbolic debugging information.
6314@ifset BOUT
6315
6316The @samp{.scl} directive is primarily associated with COFF output; when
6317configured to generate @code{b.out} output format, @command{@value{AS}}
6318accepts this directive but ignores it.
6319@end ifset
6320@end ifset
6321
6322@ifset COFF-ELF
6323@node Section
6324@section @code{.section @var{name}}
6325
6326@cindex named section
6327Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
6328named @var{name}.
6329
6330This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
6331named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
6332with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
6333
6334@ifset COFF
6335@ifset ELF
6336@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6337@subheading COFF Version
6338@end ifset
6339
6340@cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
6341For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
6342ways:
6343
6344@smallexample
6345.section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
6346.section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
6347@end smallexample
6348
6349If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
6350section.  Each flag is a single character.  The following flags are recognized:
6351
6352@table @code
6353@item b
6354bss section (uninitialized data)
6355@item n
6356section is not loaded
6357@item w
6358writable section
6359@item d
6360data section
6361@item e
6362exclude section from linking
6363@item r
6364read-only section
6365@item x
6366executable section
6367@item s
6368shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
6369@item a
6370ignored.  (For compatibility with the ELF version)
6371@item y
6372section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
6373@item 0-9
6374single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
6375@end table
6376
6377If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name.  If
6378the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
6379loaded and writable.  Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
6380from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
6381will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
6382
6383If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
6384taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
6385@end ifset
6386
6387@ifset ELF
6388@ifset COFF
6389@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6390@subheading ELF Version
6391@end ifset
6392
6393@cindex Section Stack
6394This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The others are
6395@code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
6396(@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
6397@code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
6398
6399@cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
6400For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
6401
6402@smallexample
6403.section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
6404@end smallexample
6405
6406@anchor{Section Name Substitutions}
6407@kindex --sectname-subst
6408@cindex section name substitution
6409If the @samp{--sectname-subst} command-line option is provided, the @var{name}
6410argument may contain a substitution sequence. Only @code{%S} is supported
6411at the moment, and substitutes the current section name. For example:
6412
6413@smallexample
6414.macro exception_code
6415.section %S.exception
6416[exception code here]
6417.previous
6418.endm
6419
6420.text
6421[code]
6422exception_code
6423[...]
6424
6425.section .init
6426[init code]
6427exception_code
6428[...]
6429@end smallexample
6430
6431The two @code{exception_code} invocations above would create the
6432@code{.text.exception} and @code{.init.exception} sections respectively.
6433This is useful e.g. to discriminate between anciliary sections that are
6434tied to setup code to be discarded after use from anciliary sections that
6435need to stay resident without having to define multiple @code{exception_code}
6436macros just for that purpose.
6437
6438The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
6439combination of the following characters:
6440
6441@table @code
6442@item a
6443section is allocatable
6444@item e
6445section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6446@item w
6447section is writable
6448@item x
6449section is executable
6450@item M
6451section is mergeable
6452@item S
6453section contains zero terminated strings
6454@item G
6455section is a member of a section group
6456@item T
6457section is used for thread-local-storage
6458@item ?
6459section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any
6460@item @code{<number>}
6461a numeric value indicating the bits to be set in the ELF section header's flags
6462field.  Note - if one or more of the alphabetic characters described above is
6463also included in the flags field, their bit values will be ORed into the
6464resulting value.
6465@item @code{<target specific>}
6466some targets extend this list with their own flag characters
6467@end table
6468
6469Note - once a section's flags have been set they cannot be changed.  There are
6470a few exceptions to this rule however.  Processor and application specific
6471flags can be added to an already defined section.  The @code{.interp},
6472@code{.strtab} and @code{.symtab} sections can have the allocate flag
6473(@code{a}) set after they are initially defined, and the @code{.note-GNU-stack}
6474section may have the executable (@code{x}) flag added.
6475
6476The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
6477
6478@table @code
6479@item @@progbits
6480section contains data
6481@item @@nobits
6482section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
6483@item @@note
6484section contains data which is used by things other than the program
6485@item @@init_array
6486section contains an array of pointers to init functions
6487@item @@fini_array
6488section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
6489@item @@preinit_array
6490section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
6491@item @@@code{<number>}
6492a numeric value to be set as the ELF section header's type field.
6493@item @@@code{<target specific>}
6494some targets extend this list with their own types
6495@end table
6496
6497Many targets only support the first three section types.  The type may be
6498enclosed in double quotes if necessary.
6499
6500Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
6501ARM) then another character is used instead.  For example the ARM port uses the
6502@code{%} character.
6503
6504Note - some sections, eg @code{.text} and @code{.data} are considered to be
6505special and have fixed types.  Any attempt to declare them with a different
6506type will generate an error from the assembler.
6507
6508If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6509be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
6510
6511@smallexample
6512.section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
6513@end smallexample
6514
6515Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
6516constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
6517@code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
6518@var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
6519the same name, same entity size and same flags.  @var{entsize} must be an
6520absolute expression.  For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
6521which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate.  Thus
6522@code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"};  A reference to the first
6523@code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
6524
6525If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6526be present along with an additional field like this:
6527
6528@smallexample
6529.section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6530@end smallexample
6531
6532The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
6533particular section belongs.  The optional linkage field can contain:
6534
6535@table @code
6536@item comdat
6537indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
6538@item .gnu.linkonce
6539an alias for comdat
6540@end table
6541
6542Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
6543the Merge flag should come first, like this:
6544
6545@smallexample
6546.section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6547@end smallexample
6548
6549If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the
6550@code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be
6551present.  Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before
6552this directive.  If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use
6553@code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly.
6554If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect.
6555
6556If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name.  If
6557the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
6558none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
6559executable.  The section will contain data.
6560
6561For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
6562directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
6563
6564@smallexample
6565.section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
6566@end smallexample
6567
6568Note that the section name is quoted.  There may be a sequence of comma
6569separated flags:
6570
6571@table @code
6572@item #alloc
6573section is allocatable
6574@item #write
6575section is writable
6576@item #execinstr
6577section is executable
6578@item #exclude
6579section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6580@item #tls
6581section is used for thread local storage
6582@end table
6583
6584This directive replaces the current section and subsection.  See the
6585contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
6586some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
6587work.
6588@end ifset
6589@end ifset
6590
6591@node Set
6592@section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
6593
6594@cindex @code{set} directive
6595@cindex symbol value, setting
6596Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.  This
6597changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
6598@var{expression}.  If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
6599flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
6600
6601You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly provided that the
6602values given to the symbol are constants.  Values that are based on expressions
6603involving other symbols are allowed, but some targets may restrict this to only
6604being done once per assembly.  This is because those targets do not set the
6605addresses of symbols at assembly time, but rather delay the assignment until a
6606final link is performed.  This allows the linker a chance to change the code in
6607the files, changing the location of, and the relative distance between, various
6608different symbols.
6609
6610If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
6611file is the last value stored into it.
6612
6613@ifset Z80
6614On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use
6615@samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
6616@end ifset
6617
6618@node Short
6619@section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
6620
6621@cindex @code{short} directive
6622@ifset GENERIC
6623@code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
6624@xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6625
6626In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
6627numbers of different lengths.  @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6628@end ifset
6629@ifclear GENERIC
6630@ifset W16
6631@code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}.  @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6632@end ifset
6633@ifset W32
6634This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
6635a 16 bit number for each.
6636@end ifset
6637@end ifclear
6638
6639@node Single
6640@section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
6641
6642@cindex @code{single} directive
6643@cindex floating point numbers (single)
6644This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas.  It
6645has the same effect as @code{.float}.
6646@ifset GENERIC
6647The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
6648@command{@value{AS}} is configured.  @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6649@end ifset
6650@ifclear GENERIC
6651@ifset IEEEFLOAT
6652On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
6653numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
6654@end ifset
6655@end ifclear
6656
6657@ifset COFF-ELF
6658@node Size
6659@section @code{.size}
6660
6661This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
6662
6663@ifset COFF
6664@ifset ELF
6665@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6666@subheading COFF Version
6667@end ifset
6668
6669@cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
6670For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
6671@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.  It is used like this:
6672
6673@smallexample
6674.size @var{expression}
6675@end smallexample
6676
6677@ifset BOUT
6678@samp{.size} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
6679@command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6680ignores it.
6681@end ifset
6682@end ifset
6683
6684@ifset ELF
6685@ifset COFF
6686@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6687@subheading ELF Version
6688@end ifset
6689
6690@cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
6691For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
6692
6693@smallexample
6694.size @var{name} , @var{expression}
6695@end smallexample
6696
6697This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
6698The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
6699arithmetic.  This directive is typically used to set the size of function
6700symbols.
6701@end ifset
6702@end ifset
6703
6704@ifclear no-space-dir
6705@node Skip
6706@section @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6707
6708@cindex @code{skip} directive
6709@cindex filling memory
6710This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}.  Both
6711@var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions.  If the comma and
6712@var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero.  This is the same as
6713@samp{.space}.
6714@end ifclear
6715
6716@node Sleb128
6717@section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
6718
6719@cindex @code{sleb128} directive
6720@var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.''  This is a
6721compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6722symbolic debugging format.  @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
6723
6724@ifclear no-space-dir
6725@node Space
6726@section @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6727
6728@cindex @code{space} directive
6729@cindex filling memory
6730This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}.  Both
6731@var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions.  If the comma
6732and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero.  This is the same
6733as @samp{.skip}.
6734
6735@ifset HPPA
6736@quotation
6737@emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
6738targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute.  See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
6739Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
6740@code{.space} directive.  @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
6741for a summary.
6742@end quotation
6743@end ifset
6744@end ifclear
6745
6746@ifset have-stabs
6747@node Stab
6748@section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
6749
6750@cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
6751@cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
6752There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
6753All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
6754The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
6755cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
6756Up to five fields are required:
6757
6758@table @var
6759@item string
6760This is the symbol's name.  It may contain any character except
6761@samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names.  Some
6762debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
6763using this field.
6764
6765@item type
6766An absolute expression.  The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
6767this expression.  Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
6768and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
6769
6770@item other
6771An absolute expression.  The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
6772low 8 bits of this expression.
6773
6774@item desc
6775An absolute expression.  The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
6776bits of this expression.
6777
6778@item value
6779An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
6780@end table
6781
6782If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
6783or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
6784you get a half-formed symbol in your object file.  This is
6785compatible with earlier assemblers!
6786
6787@table @code
6788@cindex @code{stabd} directive
6789@item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
6790
6791The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
6792It is a null pointer, for compatibility.  Older assemblers used a
6793null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
6794strings.
6795
6796The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
6797relocatably.  When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
6798is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
6799assembled.
6800
6801@cindex @code{stabn} directive
6802@item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6803The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
6804
6805@cindex @code{stabs} directive
6806@item .stabs @var{string} ,  @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6807All five fields are specified.
6808@end table
6809@end ifset
6810@c end     have-stabs
6811
6812@node String
6813@section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
6814"@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
6815
6816@cindex string, copying to object file
6817@cindex string8, copying to object file
6818@cindex string16, copying to object file
6819@cindex string32, copying to object file
6820@cindex string64, copying to object file
6821@cindex @code{string} directive
6822@cindex @code{string8} directive
6823@cindex @code{string16} directive
6824@cindex @code{string32} directive
6825@cindex @code{string64} directive
6826
6827Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file.  You may specify more than
6828one string to copy, separated by commas.  Unless otherwise specified for a
6829particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
6830You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
6831
6832The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
6833the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
6834copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively.  The expanded characters
6835are stored in target endianness byte order.
6836
6837Example:
6838@smallexample
6839	.string32 "BYE"
6840expands to:
6841	.string   "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0"  /* On little endian targets.  */
6842	.string   "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E"  /* On big endian targets.  */
6843@end smallexample
6844
6845
6846@node Struct
6847@section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
6848
6849@cindex @code{struct} directive
6850Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
6851which must be an absolute expression.  You might use this as follows:
6852@smallexample
6853        .struct 0
6854field1:
6855        .struct field1 + 4
6856field2:
6857        .struct field2 + 4
6858field3:
6859@end smallexample
6860This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
6861@code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
6862value 8.  Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
6863use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
6864before further assembly.
6865
6866@ifset ELF
6867@node SubSection
6868@section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
6869
6870@cindex @code{subsection} directive
6871@cindex Section Stack
6872This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The others are
6873@code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
6874@code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6875(@pxref{Previous}).
6876
6877This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}.  The current
6878section is not changed.  The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
6879in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
6880@end ifset
6881
6882@ifset ELF
6883@node Symver
6884@section @code{.symver}
6885@cindex @code{symver} directive
6886@cindex symbol versioning
6887@cindex versions of symbols
6888Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
6889within a source file.  This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
6890typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
6891There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
6892into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
6893shared library.
6894
6895For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
6896@smallexample
6897.symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}
6898@end smallexample
6899If the symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
6900being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
6901alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
6902just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
6903permitted in symbol names.  The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
6904of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced.  The name @var{name}
6905itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
6906have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
6907file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
6908function is being mentioned.  The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
6909the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
6910building a shared library.  If you are attempting to override a versioned
6911symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
6912nodename of the symbol you are trying to override.
6913
6914If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
6915references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}.  If no
6916reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
6917symbol table.
6918
6919Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6920@smallexample
6921.symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
6922@end smallexample
6923In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
6924the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
6925difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
6926references to @var{name2} by the linker.
6927
6928The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6929@smallexample
6930.symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
6931@end smallexample
6932When @var{name} is not defined within the
6933file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
6934@var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
6935name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
6936@end ifset
6937
6938@ifset COFF
6939@node Tag
6940@section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
6941
6942@cindex COFF structure debugging
6943@cindex structure debugging, COFF
6944@cindex @code{tag} directive
6945This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
6946information in the symbol table.  It is only permitted inside
6947@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.  Tags are used to link structure
6948definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
6949@ifset BOUT
6950
6951@samp{.tag} is only used when generating COFF format output; when
6952@command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6953ignores it.
6954@end ifset
6955@end ifset
6956
6957@node Text
6958@section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
6959
6960@cindex @code{text} directive
6961Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
6962the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
6963expression.  If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
6964is used.
6965
6966@node Title
6967@section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
6968
6969@cindex @code{title} directive
6970@cindex listing control: title line
6971Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
6972source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
6973
6974This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6975it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6976
6977@ifset COFF-ELF
6978@node Type
6979@section @code{.type}
6980
6981This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
6982
6983@ifset COFF
6984@ifset ELF
6985@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6986@subheading COFF Version
6987@end ifset
6988
6989@cindex COFF symbol type
6990@cindex symbol type, COFF
6991@cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
6992For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
6993@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.  It is used like this:
6994
6995@smallexample
6996.type @var{int}
6997@end smallexample
6998
6999This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
7000entry.
7001
7002@ifset BOUT
7003@samp{.type} is associated only with COFF format output; when
7004@command{@value{AS}} is configured for @code{b.out} output, it accepts this
7005directive but ignores it.
7006@end ifset
7007@end ifset
7008
7009@ifset ELF
7010@ifset COFF
7011@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
7012@subheading ELF Version
7013@end ifset
7014
7015@cindex ELF symbol type
7016@cindex symbol type, ELF
7017@cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
7018For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
7019
7020@smallexample
7021.type @var{name} , @var{type description}
7022@end smallexample
7023
7024This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
7025function symbol or an object symbol.  There are five different syntaxes
7026supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
7027compatibility with various other assemblers.
7028
7029Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
7030@samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
7031below do not work on all architectures.  The first variant will be accepted by
7032the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
7033maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
7034assemblers.
7035
7036The syntaxes supported are:
7037
7038@smallexample
7039  .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
7040  .type <name>,#<type>
7041  .type <name>,@@<type>
7042  .type <name>,%<type>
7043  .type <name>,"<type>"
7044@end smallexample
7045
7046The types supported are:
7047
7048@table @gcctabopt
7049@item STT_FUNC
7050@itemx function
7051Mark the symbol as being a function name.
7052
7053@item STT_GNU_IFUNC
7054@itemx gnu_indirect_function
7055Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
7056processing.  (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems).
7057
7058@item STT_OBJECT
7059@itemx object
7060Mark the symbol as being a data object.
7061
7062@item STT_TLS
7063@itemx tls_object
7064Mark the symbol as being a thead-local data object.
7065
7066@item STT_COMMON
7067@itemx common
7068Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
7069
7070@item STT_NOTYPE
7071@itemx notype
7072Does not mark the symbol in any way.  It is supported just for completeness.
7073
7074@item gnu_unique_object
7075Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object.  The dynamic linker
7076will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
7077name and type in use.  (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU
7078systems).
7079
7080@end table
7081
7082Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
7083
7084@end ifset
7085@end ifset
7086
7087@node Uleb128
7088@section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
7089
7090@cindex @code{uleb128} directive
7091@var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.''  This is a
7092compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
7093symbolic debugging format.  @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
7094
7095@ifset COFF
7096@node Val
7097@section @code{.val @var{addr}}
7098
7099@cindex @code{val} directive
7100@cindex COFF value attribute
7101@cindex value attribute, COFF
7102This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
7103records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
7104entry.
7105@ifset BOUT
7106
7107@samp{.val} is used only for COFF output; when @command{@value{AS}} is
7108configured for @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but ignores it.
7109@end ifset
7110@end ifset
7111
7112@ifset ELF
7113@node Version
7114@section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
7115
7116@cindex @code{version} directive
7117This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
7118formatted note of type NT_VERSION.  The note's name is set to @code{string}.
7119@end ifset
7120
7121@ifset ELF
7122@node VTableEntry
7123@section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
7124
7125@cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
7126This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
7127@code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
7128
7129@node VTableInherit
7130@section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
7131
7132@cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
7133This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
7134@code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
7135parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol.  As a special case the
7136parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
7137@end ifset
7138
7139@node Warning
7140@section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
7141@cindex warning directive
7142Similar to the directive @code{.error}
7143(@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
7144
7145@node Weak
7146@section @code{.weak @var{names}}
7147
7148@cindex @code{weak} directive
7149This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
7150@code{names}.  If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
7151
7152On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension.  This
7153directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
7154@code{names}.  If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
7155
7156On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
7157When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
7158alternate symbol to hold the default value.
7159
7160@node Weakref
7161@section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
7162
7163@cindex @code{weakref} directive
7164This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
7165be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
7166If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
7167will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
7168symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
7169
7170The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
7171assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
7172symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
7173resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
7174had the references to the alias removed.
7175
7176The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
7177within the assembler.
7178
7179@node Word
7180@section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
7181
7182@cindex @code{word} directive
7183This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
7184separated by commas.
7185@ifclear GENERIC
7186@ifset W32
7187For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
7188@end ifset
7189@ifset W16
7190For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
7191@end ifset
7192@end ifclear
7193@ifset GENERIC
7194
7195The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
7196depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
7197@end ifset
7198
7199@c on amd29k, i960, sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
7200@c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
7201@ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7202@cindex difference tables altered
7203@cindex altered difference tables
7204@quotation
7205@emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
7206@end quotation
7207
7208@ifset GENERIC
7209Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
7210addressing, require the following special treatment.  If the machine of
7211interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
7212@pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
7213
7214@end ifset
7215In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
7216@command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
7217Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
7218compilers as part of jump tables.  Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
7219directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
7220@code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
7221creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
7222This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
7223first byte after the secondary table.  This short-jump prevents the flow
7224of control from accidentally falling into the new table.  Inside the
7225table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}.  The original @samp{.word}
7226contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
7227@code{sym2}.
7228
7229If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
7230secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted.  If there was a
7231@samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
7232long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
7233and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
7234minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
7235entries in the original jump table as necessary.
7236
7237@ifset INTERNALS
7238@emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
7239@samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
7240assembly language programmers.
7241@end ifset
7242@end ifset
7243@c end     DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7244
7245@ifclear no-space-dir
7246@node Zero
7247@section @code{.zero @var{size}}
7248
7249@cindex @code{zero} directive
7250@cindex filling memory with zero bytes
7251This directive emits @var{size} 0-valued bytes.  @var{size} must be an absolute
7252expression.  This directive is actually an alias for the @samp{.skip} directive
7253so in can take an optional second argument of the value to store in the bytes
7254instead of zero.  Using @samp{.zero} in this way would be confusing however.
7255@end ifclear
7256
7257@node Deprecated
7258@section Deprecated Directives
7259
7260@cindex deprecated directives
7261@cindex obsolescent directives
7262One day these directives won't work.
7263They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
7264@table @t
7265@item .abort
7266@item .line
7267@end table
7268
7269@ifset ELF
7270@node Object Attributes
7271@chapter Object Attributes
7272@cindex object attributes
7273
7274@command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
7275into object files for that architecture.  But not all object files are alike.
7276Many architectures support incompatible variations.  For instance, floating
7277point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
7278requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
7279passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
7280hardware floating point unit.  Or, if two objects are built for different
7281generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
7282newer generation at run-time.
7283
7284This information is useful during and after linking.  At link time,
7285@command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files.  After link
7286time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
7287correctly.
7288
7289Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes.  Each
7290attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}.  The vendor is a
7291string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag.  The tag is an integer,
7292and indicates what property the attribute describes.  The value may be a string
7293or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object.  Missing
7294attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
7295
7296Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
7297The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
7298
7299@menu
7300* GNU Object Attributes::               @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7301* Defining New Object Attributes::      Defining New Object Attributes
7302@end menu
7303
7304@node GNU Object Attributes
7305@section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7306
7307The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
7308with vendor @samp{gnu}.
7309
7310Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
7311its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
7312an integer value if the tag number is even.  The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
73132} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
7314architecture-dependent ones.
7315
7316@subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
7317
7318These attributes are valid on all architectures.
7319
7320@table @r
7321@item Tag_compatibility (32)
7322The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name.  If
7323the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains.  If it is 1,
7324then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain.  If it is greater
7325than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
7326arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
7327@end table
7328
7329@subsection MIPS Attributes
7330
7331@table @r
7332@item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
7333The floating-point ABI used by this object file.  The value will be:
7334
7335@itemize @bullet
7336@item
73370 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7338@item
73391 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a standard
7340double-precision FPU.
7341@item
73422 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
7343@item
73443 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7345@item
73464 for files using the deprecated hardware floating-point ABI which used 64-bit
7347floating-point registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and increased the
7348number of callee-saved floating-point registers.
7349@item
73505 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a double-precision FPU
7351with either 32-bit or 64-bit floating-point registers and 32-bit
7352general-purpose registers.
7353@item
73546 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7355registers and 32-bit general-purpose registers.
7356@item
73577 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7358registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and a rule that forbids the
7359direct use of odd-numbered single-precision floating-point registers.
7360@end itemize
7361@end table
7362
7363@subsection PowerPC Attributes
7364
7365@table @r
7366@item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
7367The floating-point ABI used by this object file.  The value will be:
7368
7369@itemize @bullet
7370@item
73710 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7372@item
73731 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7374@item
73752 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7376@item
73773 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7378@end itemize
7379
7380@item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
7381The vector ABI used by this object file.  The value will be:
7382
7383@itemize @bullet
7384@item
73850 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7386@item
73871 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
7388@item
73892 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
7390@item
73913 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
7392@end itemize
7393@end table
7394
7395@subsection IBM z Systems Attributes
7396
7397@table @r
7398@item Tag_GNU_S390_ABI_Vector (8)
7399The vector ABI used by this object file.  The value will be:
7400
7401@itemize @bullet
7402@item
74030 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7404@item
74051 for files using software vector ABI.
7406@item
74072 for files using hardware vector ABI.
7408@end itemize
7409@end table
7410
7411@node Defining New Object Attributes
7412@section Defining New Object Attributes
7413
7414If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
7415will need to modify.  New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
7416mailing list.
7417
7418@itemize @bullet
7419@item
7420This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
7421@item
7422The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
7423@item
7424The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
7425and issue any appropriate link warnings.
7426@item
7427Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
7428@item
7429@file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
7430@item
7431GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
7432@end itemize
7433
7434@end ifset
7435
7436@ifset GENERIC
7437@node Machine Dependencies
7438@chapter Machine Dependent Features
7439
7440@cindex machine dependencies
7441The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
7442each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs.  Floating point representations
7443vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
7444directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
7445assemblers on a particular platform.  Finally, some versions of
7446@command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
7447optimization.
7448
7449This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
7450include details on any machine's instruction set.  For details on that
7451subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
7452
7453@menu
7454@ifset AARCH64
7455* AArch64-Dependent::		AArch64 Dependent Features
7456@end ifset
7457@ifset ALPHA
7458* Alpha-Dependent::		Alpha Dependent Features
7459@end ifset
7460@ifset ARC
7461* ARC-Dependent::               ARC Dependent Features
7462@end ifset
7463@ifset ARM
7464* ARM-Dependent::               ARM Dependent Features
7465@end ifset
7466@ifset AVR
7467* AVR-Dependent::               AVR Dependent Features
7468@end ifset
7469@ifset Blackfin
7470* Blackfin-Dependent::		Blackfin Dependent Features
7471@end ifset
7472@ifset CR16
7473* CR16-Dependent::              CR16 Dependent Features
7474@end ifset
7475@ifset CRIS
7476* CRIS-Dependent::              CRIS Dependent Features
7477@end ifset
7478@ifset D10V
7479* D10V-Dependent::              D10V Dependent Features
7480@end ifset
7481@ifset D30V
7482* D30V-Dependent::              D30V Dependent Features
7483@end ifset
7484@ifset EPIPHANY
7485* Epiphany-Dependent::          EPIPHANY Dependent Features
7486@end ifset
7487@ifset H8/300
7488* H8/300-Dependent::            Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7489@end ifset
7490@ifset HPPA
7491* HPPA-Dependent::              HPPA Dependent Features
7492@end ifset
7493@ifset I370
7494* ESA/390-Dependent::           IBM ESA/390 Dependent Features
7495@end ifset
7496@ifset I80386
7497* i386-Dependent::              Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
7498@end ifset
7499@ifset I860
7500* i860-Dependent::              Intel 80860 Dependent Features
7501@end ifset
7502@ifset I960
7503* i960-Dependent::              Intel 80960 Dependent Features
7504@end ifset
7505@ifset IA64
7506* IA-64-Dependent::             Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
7507@end ifset
7508@ifset IP2K
7509* IP2K-Dependent::              IP2K Dependent Features
7510@end ifset
7511@ifset LM32
7512* LM32-Dependent::              LM32 Dependent Features
7513@end ifset
7514@ifset M32C
7515* M32C-Dependent::              M32C Dependent Features
7516@end ifset
7517@ifset M32R
7518* M32R-Dependent::              M32R Dependent Features
7519@end ifset
7520@ifset M680X0
7521* M68K-Dependent::              M680x0 Dependent Features
7522@end ifset
7523@ifset M68HC11
7524* M68HC11-Dependent::           M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
7525@end ifset
7526@ifset METAG
7527* Meta-Dependent ::             Meta Dependent Features
7528@end ifset
7529@ifset MICROBLAZE
7530* MicroBlaze-Dependent::	MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
7531@end ifset
7532@ifset MIPS
7533* MIPS-Dependent::              MIPS Dependent Features
7534@end ifset
7535@ifset MMIX
7536* MMIX-Dependent::              MMIX Dependent Features
7537@end ifset
7538@ifset MSP430
7539* MSP430-Dependent::		MSP430 Dependent Features
7540@end ifset
7541@ifset NDS32
7542* NDS32-Dependent::             Andes NDS32 Dependent Features
7543@end ifset
7544@ifset NIOSII
7545* NiosII-Dependent::            Altera Nios II Dependent Features
7546@end ifset
7547@ifset NS32K
7548* NS32K-Dependent::		NS32K Dependent Features
7549@end ifset
7550@ifset PDP11
7551* PDP-11-Dependent::            PDP-11 Dependent Features
7552@end ifset
7553@ifset PJ
7554* PJ-Dependent::                picoJava Dependent Features
7555@end ifset
7556@ifset PPC
7557* PPC-Dependent::               PowerPC Dependent Features
7558@end ifset
7559@ifset RL78
7560* RL78-Dependent::              RL78 Dependent Features
7561@end ifset
7562@ifset RX
7563* RX-Dependent::                RX Dependent Features
7564@end ifset
7565@ifset S390
7566* S/390-Dependent::             IBM S/390 Dependent Features
7567@end ifset
7568@ifset SCORE
7569* SCORE-Dependent::             SCORE Dependent Features
7570@end ifset
7571@ifset SH
7572* SH-Dependent::                Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
7573* SH64-Dependent::              SuperH SH64 Dependent Features
7574@end ifset
7575@ifset SPARC
7576* Sparc-Dependent::             SPARC Dependent Features
7577@end ifset
7578@ifset TIC54X
7579* TIC54X-Dependent::            TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
7580@end ifset
7581@ifset TIC6X
7582* TIC6X-Dependent ::            TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features
7583@end ifset
7584@ifset TILEGX
7585* TILE-Gx-Dependent ::          Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features
7586@end ifset
7587@ifset TILEPRO
7588* TILEPro-Dependent ::          Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features
7589@end ifset
7590@ifset V850
7591* V850-Dependent::              V850 Dependent Features
7592@end ifset
7593@ifset VAX
7594* Vax-Dependent::               VAX Dependent Features
7595@end ifset
7596@ifset VISIUM
7597* Visium-Dependent::            Visium Dependent Features
7598@end ifset
7599@ifset XGATE
7600* XGATE-Dependent::             XGATE Features
7601@end ifset
7602@ifset XSTORMY16
7603* XSTORMY16-Dependent::         XStormy16 Dependent Features
7604@end ifset
7605@ifset XTENSA
7606* Xtensa-Dependent::            Xtensa Dependent Features
7607@end ifset
7608@ifset Z80
7609* Z80-Dependent::               Z80 Dependent Features
7610@end ifset
7611@ifset Z8000
7612* Z8000-Dependent::             Z8000 Dependent Features
7613@end ifset
7614@end menu
7615
7616@lowersections
7617@end ifset
7618
7619@c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
7620@c in single-cpu versions.  This is mainly achieved by @lowersections.  There is a
7621@c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
7622@c "Machine Dependencies".  Hence the conditional nodenames in each
7623@c major node below.  Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
7624@c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
7625@c in both conditional blocks.
7626
7627@ifset AARCH64
7628@include c-aarch64.texi
7629@end ifset
7630
7631@ifset ALPHA
7632@include c-alpha.texi
7633@end ifset
7634
7635@ifset ARC
7636@include c-arc.texi
7637@end ifset
7638
7639@ifset ARM
7640@include c-arm.texi
7641@end ifset
7642
7643@ifset AVR
7644@include c-avr.texi
7645@end ifset
7646
7647@ifset Blackfin
7648@include c-bfin.texi
7649@end ifset
7650
7651@ifset CR16
7652@include c-cr16.texi
7653@end ifset
7654
7655@ifset CRIS
7656@include c-cris.texi
7657@end ifset
7658
7659@ifset Renesas-all
7660@ifclear GENERIC
7661@node Machine Dependencies
7662@chapter Machine Dependent Features
7663
7664The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
7665and there are also some syntax differences among the families.  This
7666chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
7667family.
7668
7669@menu
7670* H8/300-Dependent::            Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7671* SH-Dependent::                Renesas SH Dependent Features
7672@end menu
7673@lowersections
7674@end ifclear
7675@end ifset
7676
7677@ifset D10V
7678@include c-d10v.texi
7679@end ifset
7680
7681@ifset D30V
7682@include c-d30v.texi
7683@end ifset
7684
7685@ifset EPIPHANY
7686@include c-epiphany.texi
7687@end ifset
7688
7689@ifset H8/300
7690@include c-h8300.texi
7691@end ifset
7692
7693@ifset HPPA
7694@include c-hppa.texi
7695@end ifset
7696
7697@ifset I370
7698@include c-i370.texi
7699@end ifset
7700
7701@ifset I80386
7702@include c-i386.texi
7703@end ifset
7704
7705@ifset I860
7706@include c-i860.texi
7707@end ifset
7708
7709@ifset I960
7710@include c-i960.texi
7711@end ifset
7712
7713@ifset IA64
7714@include c-ia64.texi
7715@end ifset
7716
7717@ifset IP2K
7718@include c-ip2k.texi
7719@end ifset
7720
7721@ifset LM32
7722@include c-lm32.texi
7723@end ifset
7724
7725@ifset M32C
7726@include c-m32c.texi
7727@end ifset
7728
7729@ifset M32R
7730@include c-m32r.texi
7731@end ifset
7732
7733@ifset M680X0
7734@include c-m68k.texi
7735@end ifset
7736
7737@ifset M68HC11
7738@include c-m68hc11.texi
7739@end ifset
7740
7741@ifset METAG
7742@include c-metag.texi
7743@end ifset
7744
7745@ifset MICROBLAZE
7746@include c-microblaze.texi
7747@end ifset
7748
7749@ifset MIPS
7750@include c-mips.texi
7751@end ifset
7752
7753@ifset MMIX
7754@include c-mmix.texi
7755@end ifset
7756
7757@ifset MSP430
7758@include c-msp430.texi
7759@end ifset
7760
7761@ifset NDS32
7762@include c-nds32.texi
7763@end ifset
7764
7765@ifset NIOSII
7766@include c-nios2.texi
7767@end ifset
7768
7769@ifset NS32K
7770@include c-ns32k.texi
7771@end ifset
7772
7773@ifset PDP11
7774@include c-pdp11.texi
7775@end ifset
7776
7777@ifset PJ
7778@include c-pj.texi
7779@end ifset
7780
7781@ifset PPC
7782@include c-ppc.texi
7783@end ifset
7784
7785@ifset RL78
7786@include c-rl78.texi
7787@end ifset
7788
7789@ifset RX
7790@include c-rx.texi
7791@end ifset
7792
7793@ifset S390
7794@include c-s390.texi
7795@end ifset
7796
7797@ifset SCORE
7798@include c-score.texi
7799@end ifset
7800
7801@ifset SH
7802@include c-sh.texi
7803@include c-sh64.texi
7804@end ifset
7805
7806@ifset SPARC
7807@include c-sparc.texi
7808@end ifset
7809
7810@ifset TIC54X
7811@include c-tic54x.texi
7812@end ifset
7813
7814@ifset TIC6X
7815@include c-tic6x.texi
7816@end ifset
7817
7818@ifset TILEGX
7819@include c-tilegx.texi
7820@end ifset
7821
7822@ifset TILEPRO
7823@include c-tilepro.texi
7824@end ifset
7825
7826@ifset V850
7827@include c-v850.texi
7828@end ifset
7829
7830@ifset VAX
7831@include c-vax.texi
7832@end ifset
7833
7834@ifset VISIUM
7835@include c-visium.texi
7836@end ifset
7837
7838@ifset XGATE
7839@include c-xgate.texi
7840@end ifset
7841
7842@ifset XSTORMY16
7843@include c-xstormy16.texi
7844@end ifset
7845
7846@ifset XTENSA
7847@include c-xtensa.texi
7848@end ifset
7849
7850@ifset Z80
7851@include c-z80.texi
7852@end ifset
7853
7854@ifset Z8000
7855@include c-z8k.texi
7856@end ifset
7857
7858@ifset GENERIC
7859@c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
7860@raisesections
7861@end ifset
7862
7863@node Reporting Bugs
7864@chapter Reporting Bugs
7865@cindex bugs in assembler
7866@cindex reporting bugs in assembler
7867
7868Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
7869
7870Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
7871not.  But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
7872entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
7873Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
7874
7875In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7876information that enables us to fix the bug.
7877
7878@menu
7879* Bug Criteria::                Have you found a bug?
7880* Bug Reporting::               How to report bugs
7881@end menu
7882
7883@node Bug Criteria
7884@section Have You Found a Bug?
7885@cindex bug criteria
7886
7887If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7888
7889@itemize @bullet
7890@cindex fatal signal
7891@cindex assembler crash
7892@cindex crash of assembler
7893@item
7894If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7895@command{@value{AS}} bug.  Reliable assemblers never crash.
7896
7897@cindex error on valid input
7898@item
7899If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7900
7901@cindex invalid input
7902@item
7903If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7904is a bug.  However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
7905be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
7906
7907@item
7908If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
7909of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
7910@end itemize
7911
7912@node Bug Reporting
7913@section How to Report Bugs
7914@cindex bug reports
7915@cindex assembler bugs, reporting
7916
7917A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products.  If
7918you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
7919contact that organization first.
7920
7921You can find contact information for many support companies and
7922individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7923distribution.
7924
7925@ifset BUGURL
7926In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
7927to @value{BUGURL}.
7928@end ifset
7929
7930The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7931@strong{report all the facts}.  If you are not sure whether to state a
7932fact or leave it out, state it!
7933
7934Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
7935and assume that some details do not matter.  Thus, you might assume that the
7936name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter.  Well, probably it does
7937not, but one cannot be sure.  Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
7938happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
7939perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
7940the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug.  Play it safe and
7941give a specific, complete example.  That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7942and the most helpful.
7943
7944Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
7945it is new to us.  Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
7946that the bug has not been reported previously.
7947
7948Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7949bell?''  This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless.  We
7950respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7951You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7952
7953To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7954
7955@itemize @bullet
7956@item
7957The version of @command{@value{AS}}.  @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
7958it with the @samp{--version} argument.
7959
7960Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7961the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
7962
7963@item
7964Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
7965
7966@item
7967The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7968version number.
7969
7970@item
7971What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
7972``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7973
7974@item
7975The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
7976observe the bug.  To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
7977all.  A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
7978
7979If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7980and then we might not encounter the bug.
7981
7982@item
7983A complete input file that will reproduce the bug.  If the bug is observed when
7984the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
7985high level language source.  Most compilers will produce the assembler source
7986when run with the @samp{-S} option.  If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
7987the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
7988file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
7989@command{@value{AS}} is being run.
7990
7991@item
7992A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7993incorrect.  For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7994
7995Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
7996will certainly notice it.  But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
7997notice unless it is glaringly wrong.  You might as well not give us a chance to
7998make a mistake.
7999
8000Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
8001explicitly.  Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
8002@command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
8003library on your system.  (This has happened!)  Your copy might crash and ours
8004would not.  If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
8005would know that the bug was not happening for us.  If you had not told us to
8006expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
8007observations.
8008
8009@item
8010If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
8011diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
8012option.  Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.  If you even
8013discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
8014by line number.
8015
8016The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8017sources.  Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8018@end itemize
8019
8020Here are some things that are not necessary:
8021
8022@itemize @bullet
8023@item
8024A description of the envelope of the bug.
8025
8026Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8027which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8028changes will not affect it.
8029
8030This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8031will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8032with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8033We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8034
8035Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8036of the original one, that is a convenience for us.  Errors in the
8037output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8038less time, and so on.
8039
8040However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8041report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8042
8043@item
8044A patch for the bug.
8045
8046A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one.  But do not omit
8047the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8048a patch is all we need.  We might see problems with your patch and decide
8049to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8050
8051Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
8052construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
8053the code.  If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
8054one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
8055
8056And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8057patch should be an improvement, we will not install it.  A test case will
8058help us to understand.
8059
8060@item
8061A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8062
8063Such guesses are usually wrong.  Even we cannot guess right about such
8064things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8065@end itemize
8066
8067@node Acknowledgements
8068@chapter Acknowledgements
8069
8070If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
8071it is not meant as a slight.  We just don't know about it.  Send mail to the
8072maintainer, and we'll correct the situation.  Currently
8073@c (October 2012),
8074the maintainer is Nick Clifton (email address @code{nickc@@redhat.com}).
8075
8076Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
8077more details?}
8078
8079Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
8080information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
8081extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
8082
8083K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
8084many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
8085up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
8086testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
8087including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
8088and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
8089support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
8090port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
8091file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
8092assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
8093
8094Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
8095in format-specific I/O modules.
8096
8097The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan.  Eric Youngdale
8098has done much work with it since.
8099
8100The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
8101
8102Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
8103
8104The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
8105University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
8106
8107Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
8108(@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
8109(which hasn't been merged in yet).  Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
8110support a.out format.
8111
8112Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
8113tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
8114Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support.  Steve also modified the COFF back end to
8115use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
8116targets.
8117
8118John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
8119simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives.  He
8120updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
8121fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
8122remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}).  John fixed many bugs, including true tested
8123cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
8124required the proverbial one-bit fix.
8125
8126Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
812768k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
8128added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
8129PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
8130
8131Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
8132
8133Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
8134
8135Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
8136along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
8137formats).  This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
8138the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
8139
8140Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
8141Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
8142Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
8143Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
8144and some initial 64-bit support).
8145
8146Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
8147
8148Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
8149support for openVMS/Alpha.
8150
8151Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
8152flavors.
8153
8154David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
8155Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
8156
8157Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
8158configuration enhancements.
8159
8160Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
8161
8162Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements.  If
8163you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
8164want to be, let us know.  Some of the history has been lost; we are not
8165intentionally leaving anyone out.
8166
8167@node GNU Free Documentation License
8168@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8169@include fdl.texi
8170
8171@node AS Index
8172@unnumbered AS Index
8173
8174@printindex cp
8175
8176@bye
8177@c Local Variables:
8178@c fill-column: 79
8179@c End:
8180